JP6425566B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine").

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, on a gaming board for playing a game, a gaming area in which gaming media such as gaming balls are shot is partitioned, and a large number of obstacle nails have a predetermined gauge array in the gaming area. In addition, the game area is provided with appropriate winning openings (for example, general winning opening, variable winning opening, starting winning opening (starting opening), prize winning opening, big winnings) A plurality of mouths, etc.) are provided, and a predetermined number of game media are paid out by receiving game media to the winning opening. In addition, the game board has an opening formed in a substantially central portion separately from the game area, and is provided with effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) capable of displaying a predetermined effect image behind the opening. Then, when the game medium is accepted to the starting winning opening (starting opening) among the winning openings, after drawing a predetermined lottery result, the effect display indicating the lottery result drawn for a predetermined time in the effect display means Depending on the lottery result displayed and displayed, there are many opportunities for the game medium to be accepted to the special winning opening etc. by opening and closing the prize winning opening and the special winning opening etc. which are normally closed according to the predetermined pattern. Then, an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) that the player has an advantage is generated.

In this type of gaming machine, an upper tray for storing gaming media for hitting into the gaming area below the gaming area in front view, and a gaming media disposed under the upper tray and overflowing from the upper tray Is generally provided with a lower plate in which is stored (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2009-28390, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the upper tray and the lower tray are simply arranged below the gaming area in the front view, so it looks like a similar gaming machine and the appeal to the player is low. was there.

Therefore, in view of the above situation, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine having high appeal to a player.

The present invention
A game area in which a predetermined game is performed,
A bulging portion having a predetermined internal space formed by bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in front view;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
An operating device accommodated in the internal space and operable by a player;
A lower plate body provided with a standing wall having a predetermined height, and a lower plate capable of receiving game media from the upper plate;
The lower plate main body is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower dish body has a first lower tray unit area facing the front of the game machine is formed, provided the said integrally with the first lower tray section to the inner space inward side with respect to the first lower tray portion And a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed ,
Further, the bulging portion has an upper plate front cover portion positioned on the front side of the upper plate,
The lower pan front cover portion provided on the front side of the first lower pan portion has a retracting portion positioned on the rear side in plan view with respect to the upper portion of the first pan lower portion of the upper pan front cover portion. It is characterized by having .
Also, a game area in which a predetermined game is performed,
A bulging portion having a predetermined internal space formed by bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in front view;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
A rendering device accommodated in the internal space and exhibiting a predetermined rendering effect;
A lower plate body provided with a standing wall having a predetermined height, and a lower plate capable of receiving game media from the upper plate;
The lower plate main body is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower dish body has a first lower tray unit area facing the front of the game machine is formed, provided the said integrally with the first lower tray section to the inner space inward side with respect to the first lower tray portion And a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed ,
Further, the bulging portion has an upper plate front cover portion positioned on the front side of the upper plate,
The lower pan front cover portion provided on the front side of the first lower pan portion has a retracting portion positioned on the rear side in plan view with respect to the upper portion of the first pan lower portion of the upper pan front cover portion. It is characterized by having .

  Thus, according to the present invention, a gaming machine with high appeal can be provided.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at a pachinko machine from the back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state which made the door frame open from the main body frame, and made the main body frame open from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side without the left frame member, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball | bowl feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case of the ball feeding unit and the tamperproof member and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the fal cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member from the front and removed the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which removed the cover member and was seen from the back. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of a door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the left front. (A) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the pan unit from the lower left rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit into every main member, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower tray in the state which removed the lower tray cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a) (C) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example provided with a different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower tray made divisible, and (b) is a schematic illustration showing a state where the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the rendering operation unit FIG. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the presentation operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of a production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the rendering operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the rendering operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the rendering operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. A portion of the operation button is cut out and a portion that is about to be hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown by the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of a rendering operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending . (A) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extending. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd rendering operation unit into every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button is extended, with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. FIG. 74 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line J-J in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 74 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in FIG. In (a), when the main screen is directed forward and the second effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, it is intended to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button (B) is an explanatory view showing a portion where the second effect operation unit in the state of (a) shows a portion that is about to be concealed by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is. In (a), the second effect operation unit is viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub screen directed forward, in an attempt to hide it by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button (B) is an explanatory view showing a portion where the second effect operation unit in the state of (a) shows a portion that is about to be concealed by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, etc. It is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the back FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in Fig.82 (a). FIG. 82 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line N-N in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 82 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line O-O in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 87 taken along the line PP. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the delivery unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery unit by each main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout device and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a delivery apparatus, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the QQ line in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction path | pass by the ball extraction movable piece in a delivery apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which open | released the ball extraction path by the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full ball channel unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full tank path unit, and was seen from the front, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full ball channel unit and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full tank path unit in the delivery unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball channel unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door has closed in the lower full tank path unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the guideway opening-closing door is opening. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full-tan ball path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board into every main structure, and was seen from back. It is the perspective view seen from the front which shows only the front component and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows only the front component and game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit of the game board from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit of the front surface unit from the front upper side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the starting opening unit from back lower. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit of the front unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the side unit from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the front unit of the attacker unit as viewed from the front upper side, (b) is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear upper side, (c) is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear lower side FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the center character of the front unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center character of a front unit from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit into each main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit by main structure, and was seen from back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the motion of the front movable decoration of the front movable presentation unit in a center character. It is a front view of the game board in which the back decoration body of the back up movable presentation unit in the back unit shows the state of the first appearance position. The state where the back top decoration of the back top movable effect unit in the back unit is the second appearance position, and the back bottom front first decoration and the back bottom second decoration of the back bottom front movable effect unit are in the appearance position Is a front view of the game board showing. A pair of shutters are opened with the first decorative surface of the back right rotating decoration of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the first decoration of the back left rotating decoration of the back left movable effect unit It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position of the back left projecting decorative body with the surface directed to the front. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with the respective second decoration surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back right rotation decoration body of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotation decoration body of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with the respective third decoration surfaces facing forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is rotating in the direction of front view counterclockwise in the back end back rotation decoration body of a back bottom back movable presentation unit in a back unit at a rising end position. In the back unit, the back decoration of the back movable movable effect unit is rotated in the clockwise direction in a front view clockwise at the rising end position, and the back four corner second decoration of the back four corner movable effect unit is at the appearance position It is a front view of the game board which shows a state. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back four corner 1st decoration of the back four corners movable production | presentation unit in a back unit in the state of an appearance position. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on; (b) is a flowchart of the main control board 1310 It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence about timer interruption control regularly performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special symbol process processing (step S14). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 1st starting opening passage process (step S32). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2nd starting opening passage processing (step S34). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 1st special symbol process processing (step S38). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit judging processing (Step S105). (A) is a big hit determination table, (B) is a symbol determination table. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (a flowchart showing a procedure of step S81. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first special symbol variation processing (step S83). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 1st special symbol stop processing (step S84). When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, it is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control unit mounted on the peripheral control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 16mS regular processing performed every 16mS by submain processing. It is specified in the command analysis process (step S601) that the judgment result notification command indicating that the reach (reach is lost, reach) is to be reached and the fluctuation pattern command are received when being controlled to the high probability time short state It is a timing chart of a battle effect that is executed by the game board side effect display device in the case. It is specified in the command analysis process (step S601) that the judgment result notification command indicating that the reach (reach is lost, reach) is to be reached and the fluctuation pattern command are received when being controlled to the high probability time short state It is a timing chart of a battle effect that is executed by the game board side effect display device in the case. When it is specified in the above command analysis process (step S601) that the determination result notification command indicating that it is a reach and the fluctuation pattern command are received when controlled to the high probability time reduction state, the game board side effect It is an explanatory view showing an example of battle production performed with a display. When it is specified in the above command analysis process (step S601) that the determination result notification command indicating that it is a reach and the fluctuation pattern command are received when controlled to the high probability time reduction state, the game board side effect It is an explanatory view showing an example of battle production performed with a display. When it is specified in the above command analysis process (step S601) that the determination result notification command indicating that it is a reach and the fluctuation pattern command are received when controlled to the high probability time reduction state, the game board side effect It is an explanatory view showing an example of battle production performed with a display. FIG. 18 is a front view of effect operation unit 400. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-holds display on the display panel of a game board side effect display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending | holding change presentation using the number display of pending | holding in the display panel of the game board side presentation display apparatus. FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of the continuation of the pending change effect of FIG. 163. It is a figure which shows an example as a continuation of pending | holding change production of FIG. FIG. 16 is a time chart schematically showing a pending change effect, a change in display color of a pending image to be processed, and a display color of the pending image to be changed in display position in accordance with the completion of the pending storage. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing each process executed by the surrounding control unit in connection with the hold storage as each process of the effect control process of step S602 in FIG. 155. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of a pending | holding number designation | designated command processing which a periphery control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of a pending | holding number designation | designated command processing which a periphery control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of a pending | holding change production | presentation determination process which a periphery control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of a pending | holding change production | presentation process which a periphery control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of a pending | holding image shift process which a periphery control part performs. It is a figure which shows each table, storage area, and processing operation required in order that a periphery control part may be related to pending storage and may perform each process. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the right unit left decoration member from the front. (B) is the perspective view which looked at the right unit left decoration member from back. (C) is the perspective view which looked at the right unit right decoration member from the front. (D) is the perspective view which looked at the right unit right decoration member from back. It is a figure for demonstrating the path of the light in the inside of the right unit right decoration member. It is a perspective view which shows the state which disassembled the door frame right side unit. It is a top view which shows the internal structure of a partition plate. (A) is a top view of a door frame right side unit. (B) is a top view which shows the internal structure of a partition plate. It is a figure which extracts and shows only the right unit right decoration member stored in a door frame right side unit, and the LED board corresponding to the right unit right decoration member in a door frame right side decoration board. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the right side unit inner surface part side. (B) is the figure which looked at the right side unit inner surface part in the door frame right side unit from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the right unit left cover from the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the inner surface. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the said side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the right side unit outer surface part side. (B) is a figure which shows the identification part 328a of the right side unit inner surface part in a present Example, and the identification part 329a periphery. It is a figure which shows the state which installed the ball loan return display part in the accommodation recessed part, and removed the right unit left decoration member. (C) is a figure which shows identification part 336c, d of right side unit inner surface part, and identification part 337c, d periphery. It is a figure which shows having arrange | positioned the right unit left decoration member from the state of FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which made the ball loan return display part correspond to each of a ball loan button and a return button, and was provided with two or more. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the right unit left decoration member from the state of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the right unit left decoration member from the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the right unit left decoration member from the state of FIG.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, an entire configuration of a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as viewed from the rear. Moreover, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in a state in which the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a door frame for a pachinko machine, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, A main unit frame 4 supported so as to be openable and closable, and removably attached to the main unit frame 4 from the front side, is made visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit.

  The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend laterally, an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which connect the both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view The outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30 on the left end side in front view of the curtain plate member 50 are provided. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a quadrangle in which the external shape of the front view extends vertically and which has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 which penetrates back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 attached to the front lower right corner below the side 111 and operable by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is attached to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game unit being attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and the dish unit 320 which are attached to the lower front on the lower side and the dish unit 320 It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 and the presentation operation unit 400 capable of presenting participatory effects. A door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 mounted on the front right side on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530 And a door frame top unit 570 attached to a front upper portion above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-like main frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main frame base 600. It is attached to upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame A body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the body frame base 600 in a front view, and a body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 is attached to the lower front of the front and is for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is attached to the right side of the main frame base in a front view. , And the door Locking unit 700 for locking between 3 and main body frame 4 and a reverse L-shaped payout attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of main body frame base 600 to pay out the game ball to the player side A unit 800, a base board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a rear of the game board 5 attached to the rear of the main frame base 600 openably and closably attached to the main frame base 600 And a back cover 980.

  Dispensing unit 800 of body frame 4 is an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of body frame base 600 and attached to the top of dispensing unit base 801 and extends upward and leftwardly. A ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from a not-shown island facility in a box shape, and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, and the gaming balls in the ball tank 802 are left as viewed from the front A tank guide 803 extending to the left and right, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 at the upper left side in a front view and guiding the gaming ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; Gaming balls which are detachably mounted on the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820 A payout device 830 which pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950 and a gaming ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward An upper full-ball path unit 850 which causes the game balls to be released from either the normal outlet 850d or the full tank outlet 850e according to the storage state of the gaming balls in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320 and the payout unit A normal guiding path 861 and a full guiding path 861 attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the gaming ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the penetrating ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the main body frame base 600 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass A speaker unit 920 having a 921. A power supply substrate box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the substrate unit base 910 and having a power supply substrate housed therein, and attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controlling the payout of gaming balls. And a delivery control board box 950. .

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are hit, and the game balls fired from the ball launcher 680 are the top of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding the game, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defining the rear end of the game area 5a There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the gaming ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the game ball has a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launcher 680. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5. Then, when the gaming balls driven into the gaming area 5a are received by the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out by the payout device 830 to the upper tray 321 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the interest of the player can be enhanced by the payout of the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of an outer frame in a pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 16 (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16 (b) is an exploded perspective view showing a disassembled (a) FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) on which the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As illustrated, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extends in the left and right direction, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. And the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 which are extended in The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side faces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left and right direction are the same surface. It is done.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front end left side of the upper frame member 10 and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60; An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left end upper portion of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 can attach the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so as to be able to open and close.

  Further, the outer frame 2 is mounted on the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat left sliding member 81 attached at a position from the left to right center of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 And a flat right sliding member 82 mounted at a position near the right end of the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 includes the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, the lower frame member 20 and the left frame member 30, and the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40, respectively. It has a connecting member 85 connected. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hooking member 90 and the lower hooking member 91 are engaged with the outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later. , Equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engagement notch 11 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. An upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached to the inside of the engagement notch 11. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is equipped with the mounting step part 12 which was depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a front view left end. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) of a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed in the same dimensions as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower lengths of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the lower frame member 20 are equal to those of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and rear width of the. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engagement notch 21 which penetrates up and down and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left fixing member 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are mounted in the engagement notch 21.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 which is recessed rearward from the front surface of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same dimension as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded shape of a metal such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward between the position near the rear with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and the vicinity of the rear end It has the convex recessed parts 31 and 41, and the protrusion parts 32 and 42 which bulged from the side surface on the opposite side of the recessed parts 31 and 41, and the inside is formed in the cavity. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the projecting portions 32 and 42, an upper left connecting member 85A, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 and a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction on the surface. The plurality of grooves make it easy for the operator to hold the pachinko machine 1 while holding the pachinko machine 1 in place when carrying or installing the pachinko machine 1 on an island facility such as a game hall or the like. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape whose rear side is open. The curtain plate member 50 is U-shaped in such a size that the game ball can pass from the left end of the rear extension 51 and the rear extension 51 extending in the form of a flat plate to the rear near the left end in front view on the upper surface A left discharge hole 52 which is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 which penetrates up and down with a size which allows the game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall 54 extending flatly upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extension 51 and a front side bulging forward from near the upper end of the standing wall 54 And a return portion 55 which is inclined so as to move rearward toward the rear.

  The curtain plate member 50 is provided on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The horizontal part 71 mentioned later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. In addition, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 at a position on the right side of the rear extension 51 at the upper surface and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end at the upper surface And a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left slide member 81 and the right slide member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although the illustration is omitted, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-like interior divided into a grid by a plurality of ribs, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape fixed to the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61 as illustrated. Of the front extension 62, a bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as going forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61 A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lower side extending from the end of the front extension 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open from the left end to the horizontal fixing A flat plate-like hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting stepped portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and fixed by screws not shown. There is. Further, the front extension portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to insert the main frame 4 by inserting the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be supported openable and closable. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
The lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is, as shown in FIG. 16, a band-plate shaped lock main body 66a having a predetermined width on the left and right and extending back and forth, and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, a resiliently deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending diagonally forward to the left after extending from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and an attachment hole vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock main body 66a And 66d. The lock member 66 is formed of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by a mounting screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member It extends forward so as to be in contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  Further, the tip end of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction such that the front end pivots to the left around the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in the normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a main frame upper hinge pin 622 (described later) of the main frame upper upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock main body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view by rotating the lock main body 66a in the direction in which the front end moves to the left by the operation of the operation portion 66b. Can be completely through. Thus, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a portion behind the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontally extending flat horizontal portion 71 and the horizontal portion 71. A large plate 72 rising up, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 vertically penetrated so that only one game ball can pass And the discharge hole 74 of the The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape whose left side is a base in a plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed at the upper end than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached at a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 to the left. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction, and extends from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the front side of the projecting portion 32 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is inserted into the main frame lower lower hinge member (not shown) in the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4, whereby the outer frame lower upper hinge pin 70 is inserted. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be able to open and close in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 matches the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. Specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 is closed as the main frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the space is rolled backward and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 By discharging the game balls dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 from the discharge holes 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game frame 4 from rolling to the rear side, the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the gaming ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member 20 and a left lower connecting member 85C connecting the left frame member 30 and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And 86 a flat lower lower fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends. The connection member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 from the front and rear both sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided separately in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 11 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40 projecting portions 32 and 42 by screws inserted from the outer side surface. It is fixed to the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion projecting rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 or the right frame member 40. Furthermore, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engagement cutout portion 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. .

[2-9. Locking mechanism of outer frame side upper hinge member]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. Refer to the description. Fig.17 (a) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper side. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c abuts on the inner circumferential surface of the hanging portion 65 The lock main body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip end portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, A space in which the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the supporting mechanism of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a The right side face of the lock body 66 is in close proximity to the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side face of the front end of the lock main body 66a and the right hanging In the normal pivotally supported state, the respective centers of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock main body 66a are diagonally offset and opposed It is in the state.

  And, in this normal support state, since the main frame upper hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin Almost no load is applied to the front end face of the locking member 66 from 622. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. In addition, since the front end face of the lock main body 66a is formed in a circular arc shape, when the operation portion 66b is turned to turn the lock member 66, the lock member 66 is smoothly turned. There is. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is taken as the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the slope of the bearing groove 63 formed in the V shape and abuts on the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force A component force F1 (a normal direction of an arc of a front end face of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arc shaped front end face, a body frame upper hinge pin 622 and a bearing groove 63 The component force F1 is directed to the center (rotation center of the lock member 66) of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side The moment that the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 rotates in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right does not work, and the hinge pin 622 of the main body frame is one of the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal pivotally supported state or a state where the action force of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, and integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from coming off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction to move to the right, the front right side of the lock main body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 to further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension 62.

  Note that even if the shape of the front end face of the lock main body 66a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the forward extension portion 62. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66, Even when the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a just abuts on the hanging portion 65, and therefore the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main frame upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper side of the main frame in the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63 Insert the hinge pin 622. When the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main frame upper hinge pin 622 abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 pivots around the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the main frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  Then, when the main frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the main frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock main body 66a is moved by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 is pivoted so that the front end of the arm moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can rotate at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It is held (locked) in the state.

  When removing the main frame upper hinge pin 622 from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the locking member 66 is operated to turn the locking member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left. The lock main body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member]
Ball catching prevention for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the left end in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the rear side of the main frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upstanding wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the incorrect tool from being inserted further backward. Thus, it is possible to prevent a fraud from being conducted through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the incorrect tool in contact with the upper wall portion 54 is bent upward, the end of the incorrect tool by the return portion 55 Can be further folded forward, so that an unauthorized tool can be prevented from invading the rear side of the main body frame 4, and cheating is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably blocked.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the gaming ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the gaming ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50. Because the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the gaming balls on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 Between the game ball and the game ball can be reduced.

  Therefore, by the game ball being pinched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged or the main frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. A gap is created between the main unit frame 4 and the gap, which can be used to prevent fraudulent acts.

[3. Overall configuration of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross section taken along the line C-C in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to the frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a rectangular shape with the outline of the front view extending vertically and the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 The handle unit 300, the dish unit 320 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the dish unit 320 A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left of the 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side Door frame top attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is provided with a knit 570, a.

  Although details will be described later, the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and back in a rectangular shape (square shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view are hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4 A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; A door frame 3 and a main body frame 4 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and a main body frame 4 and an outer frame 2 An open / close cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending gaming balls to the ball launcher 680, and a ball attached to the lower surface of the door frame base 110 And a fall cover unit 270 for receiving the game balls which have been fired by the launch device 680 and have not reached the game area 5a and discharged to the lower tray 322.

  The details of the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described later, but the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player turning the rotatable handle 302. It is possible to drive into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with an extra strength.

  The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. The lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for extracting the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a cash obtained by subtracting a game ball loaned from a ball lending machine or a return button 329 for returning a prepaid card, a cash inserted into the ball lending machine And a ball loan return display unit 330 for displaying the number of remaining prepaid cards and the like, a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332, which allow reception of the player's operation at the time of presentation, and a lower tray Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player It can be done. Although this effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, a door frame side effect capable of displaying the effect image, which is disposed so as to be visible from the player side in the operation button 410 and the large operation button 410 operable by the player And a display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the left outside of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting light.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320, though the detailed contents will be described later. It decorates the right outside of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 is provided at the front end of the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on the left and right both sides projecting largely forward than the door frame left side unit 530. And a right unit decorative lens member 561. The door frame right side unit 550 can emit and decorate the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the left and right sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 spaced apart to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the front center, and the top middle decoration member 576 A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in a front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. In the door frame base unit 100, the handle unit 300 is attached to the front lower corner, and the plate unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  The door frame base unit 100 is, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 which has a rectangular shape whose front view outline extends vertically and which penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the reinforcing unit 130 are projected forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame upper hinge member 140 and a door frame lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the body frame upper hinge member 620 and the body frame lower hinge member 640, and a front face of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 A door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base 110 in front view and is attached to the cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 for closing the through hole 111, a crime prevention cover 200 for covering a lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open / close cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to project forward through the door frame base 110. 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a rear cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decoration substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending display portion 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) And a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the upper speakers 573 and the like and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the main body frame 4.

3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 is penetrated back and forth, and is provided with the penetration opening 111 formed in the substantially rectangular shape which the inner peripheral shape in the plain view extended up and down. The upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the through hole 111 approach the outer periphery of the door frame base 110 respectively, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is from the lower end of the door frame base 110 vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at the lower right corner in the front view of the front view, and is inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly more forward than the right end side, the handle mounting surface 112, and the through hole 111. Between the front and the rear in the front view and the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening and closing cylinder unit 210 is attached, and the cylinder mounting portion 113 penetrates back and forth The cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting surface 112 are penetrated back and forth in front view left side, and the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are made forward. And a ball feed opening 115 for making it face.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, The lower plate passage port 116 and the front side of the door frame base 110 are penetrated forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 in the vicinity of the left end, and the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270 is faced forward Glass plate mounting portion 118 into which the glass passage 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted and the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted from the rear surface to the front along the inner periphery of the through hole 111 along the inner periphery of the through hole 111 And a speaker insertion hole 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1 b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110, thereby enhancing the strength and rigidity of the door frame base (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left and right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a laterally extending middle reinforcement attached below the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side in a front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side in the front surface on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 It has a sheet metal 134 and a locking / locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame wedge 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

  The left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking / locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending a metal sheet. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132 a penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although not shown in detail, the reinforcing unit 130 has portions of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 which are bent in the front-rear direction, The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the portion, and the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as a piano wire and a screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1 c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame upper hinge member 140 is a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141 a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 which penetrates the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 Between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 And a lock spring 144 urging the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece connecting the rear ends of a pair of projecting pieces 141a although not shown, and the shape of the side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, mounting pieces connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projecting upward from the upper projecting piece 141 a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620. Moreover, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the site | part which protrudes below rather than the lower side piece 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

  The wedge member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted. The upper end is in contact with the wedge member 143, and the lower end is in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the wedge member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141 a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the wedge member 143. .

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. By coming into contact with the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes upward by a predetermined amount than the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and pulls the portion downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 to open the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved entirely downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it down. Can. Thereby, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, whereby the front left upper end of the door frame 3 is obtained. , And can be rotatably supported relative to the body frame 4.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower lower hinge member 150 described later. It is coaxially supported with the lower hinge pin 152. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a good state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1 d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat extending piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket And a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extension piece 151a.

  The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the flat extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and the overall shape of the side view Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) of the lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

  The lower end of the lower door frame hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end portion is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is disposed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame lower hinge member 640. Support.

[3-1 e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front of the door frame base 110 on the left side in a front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height at a position lower than the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through opening 111 A door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height at the lower position of the frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage 117 And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 are respectively provided with a plurality of LEDs 161 a and 162 a capable of emitting light forward on the front surface. The LEDs 161a and 162a are full color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530 described later in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161 a and 162 a provided on the front surface By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be lighted and decorated.

[3-1 f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit attachment member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit attachment member 170 has a disk-like base 171 rotatably mounted about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a bar-like projection from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion outside the glass unit attachment portion 118 below the pair of speaker insertion holes 119 in the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  By setting the glass unit attachment member 170 to rotate so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, the protrusion 172 is more outward than the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. In the state of being positioned, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit attachment portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base portion 171 with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 is glass The rear side of the mounting piece 191 a of the unit 190 abuts against the rear side of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit attachment member 170, the projection 172 projects from the disk-like base 171 rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so the center of gravity of the glass unit attachment member 170 is located in the projection 172 . From this, in the state where the glass unit attachment member 170 can freely rotate, the protrusion 172 is stabilized in the state of protruding downward from the base 171. And, in the glass unit attachment member 170, since the projection 172 restricts the backward movement of the glass unit 190 at the rotational position where the projection 172 projects downward from the base 171, the glass unit attachment Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction on the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, the glass unit attachment member 170 is rotated so that the projection 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the projection 172 is attached to the attachment piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 from the rear end of the cylindrical cylindrical portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and the rear end of the cylindrical portion 181. A plurality of annular flanges 182 extending, and a plurality of protruding into the cylindrical portion 181 and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 181 and disposed at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, the three protruding ridges 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 are provided to connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181.

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 is formed to have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. The three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only in a state where the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 coincide with each other. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182 The axis 181 is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the inclined state as well.

[3-1 h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 is for closing the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-like glass frame 191 attachable to the glass unit attachment portion 118 larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110, and the inside of the glass frame 191 closed. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated in the front and back direction so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 26 etc.).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending flatly outward from a position lower than the front left and right upper corners, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side And a plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be in contact with the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191 b is insertable into the space between the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base 110 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated to make the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 a mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame.

  When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed in the reverse procedure to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110.

[3-1 i. Security cover]
The crime prevention cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The crime prevention cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. Security cover 200 is disposed with a flat main body portion 201 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat rear projection piece 202 which protrudes backwards short along the outer peripheral edge of main body portion 201, and is separated left and right And a pair of locking pieces 203 that project forward beyond the main body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward more than the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5 a in a state where it is assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer periphery of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in the shape of a shallow box opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and the strength and the rigidity are high. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protrusion 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. A rear projection 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1 ing.

  The rear projection 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the gaming ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the gaming ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not abut the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200, and the inside of the gaming area 5a There is no impediment to hitting the game ball into.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 is elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the crime prevention cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  In the state where the crime prevention cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191). The removed rear projection 202 is in a state of being inserted into the inside of the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. In addition, the security cover 200 has a state in which the rear projection 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward more than the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component 1000. . As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is intricately bent by the rear projection 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front of the board 5 between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projection 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , And can prevent unauthorized tools from entering the gaming area 5a.

[3-1 j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a keyhole 211a on the front surface and a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 extending in the front and rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and locking operation of a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmitting member 212 to be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of 700 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, either clockwise or counterclockwise in front view Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

  The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear) opened at the rear, and is directed from the rear end to the front at a position opposite to sandwich the central axis. And a pair of notched portions 212a. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of cutouts 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (a key inserted into the key hole 211 a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 and the key cylinder 710 can be rotated.

  The cylinder mounting plate metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in plan view is projected forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting plate 213 has a rectangular plate-like front plate portion 213a that extends vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b that extend in a flat plate shape rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in the form of a flat plate in the direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left in front view is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right in front view is of the reinforcing unit 130 It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Thereby, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  In the open / close cylinder unit 210 assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 is the cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 and a pair of the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are accommodated in a box-like cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open rearward.

[3-1 k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the back case removed and the tamperproof member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball hitting and firing device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be It can be pulled out to the lower plate by the operation of the removal button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front and back direction An entrance 251a, and a box-like front cover 251 having a ball outlet 251b opened to the lower side of the entrance 251a and opened at the rear, and a box closing the rear end of the front cover 251 and opening the front , And a rear cover 252 having a striking ball supply port 252a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball which has penetrated in the longitudinal direction and entered from the entrance 251a of the anterior cover 251, and the rear cover 252 and the front cover 251. Between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251, there is provided a partition portion 253a which is pivotally supported rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251. The game ball on the separating member 253a of the ball removing member 253 and the ball removing member 253 is sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 252a of the back cover 252, and an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 A ball feed member 254 rotatably supported around the ball feed member 254 and a ball feed solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feed member 254 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 250 is arranged such that the ball feeding member 254 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 251 a in front view, The ball feeding solenoids 255 are respectively disposed on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 251 c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251 b in front view. The actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, is designed to extend forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feed guiding path 323e of the pan unit base 323 and the upstream side of the ball removing guiding path 323f. It is formed so as to close from the rear side a site which is open to the rear at the end side.

  The ball removing member 253 divides the space between the inlet 251 a and the ball outlet 251 b below the inlet 251 a and divides the lower surface in the direction of the ball feeding member 254, and the ball of the partition 253 a It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b from near the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end is rotated about an axis extending in the front and rear direction From the side surface of the pivoting rod 253b below the actuating rod 253c, the pivoting rod 253b supported movably, the rod-like operating rod 253c projecting forward from the upper end of the pivoting rod 253b, and the operating rod 253c And a weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253 c of the ball removing member 253 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 251 c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The actuating rod 253 c abuts on the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327 a operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball release button 327 of the disc unit 320 via the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feed member 254 is directed toward the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253, and has a blocking portion 254a having a fan-like plan view centering on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. The ball holding portion 254b is recessed in an arc shape toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped collar portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 is sized to be able to hold one gaming ball. The ball feed member 254 is pivoted about the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 254 c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the ball holding portion 254b is in communication with the ball hitting supply port 252a at the same time as the blocking portion 254a faces the partition portion 253a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a. It is pivoted between the holding position facing it. When the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position, the gaming ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 252a to the ball striking device 650, and the gaming ball entered into the partitioning portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the movement toward the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting supply port 252a) is blocked by the blocking portion 254a, and the movement of the ball holding portion 254b remains on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 is turned to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange portion 254c side closes the hitting supply port 252a. The game ball on the partition part 253a is held in the ball holding part 254b by only one.

  In addition, the ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 255, and a back and forth movement of the ball feed rod 256 in the vertical direction And a ball feed crank 257 for pivoting the ball feed member 254 around the vertically extending axis while pivoting about the axially extending axis. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 and extends in the left and right direction from an engaging portion 257a and a side engaged with the ball feed operating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a A shaft portion 257b disposed on the opposite side and pivotally supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and a ball feeding member 254 extending upward from the shaft portion 257b. And a transmission portion 257c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 256 which is rocked by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 255 which is advanced and retracted in the vertical direction by the ball feed actuating rod 256 and the ball feeding crank 257 It can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 256 swings away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is Is located at the supply position. In addition, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip of the swinging ball is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 turns to the holding position. . That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one gaming ball and the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 Can be sent (supplied) to the hit ball launcher 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by the firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 682.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 253 rotatably supported on the ball feeding unit 250 is configured such that a moment is applied by the weight portion 253 d so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, but it protrudes forward The rotation of the actuating rod 253c is restricted by the contact of the actuating rod 253c with the upper end of the actuating transmission portion 327a which is operated by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball releasing button 327 of the disc unit 320. The parting part 253a of the part separates the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, and the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  Then, when the player presses the upper bowl ball release button 327 of the tray unit 320 downward, the upper bowl ball removal slider 327b slides downward with the operation transmission portion 327a to move the operation transmission portion 327a downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c is also moved relatively downward. The movement of the actuating rod 253c downward with the actuating transmission portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partitioning portion 253a It is released. Thereby, the game ball entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball removal guiding path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper disc ball removal slider 327b in which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the actuating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is biased upward by the upper disc ball removal spring 327c. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper disc ball release spring 327c through the actuating rod 253c, and breakage of the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with a rectangular attachment recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) etc.) recessed forward in the upper right in the back view of the hitting supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud preventing member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252 b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends in the left and right direction, and is separated vertically at a substantially central position in the vertical direction between predetermined distances from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 262, and an inclined portion 263 each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other . The upper piece portion 261 of the tamper-proof member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260 so that the right end in the front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 262 extends in the same plane as the general surface of the tamperproof member 260. Thus, in the plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove which spreads as it goes to the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 is in communication with the inside of the bat striking hole supply port 252a. Become.

  According to this fraud preventing member 260, the illegal gaming ball attached with the string is driven from the upper plate 321 through the ball feeding unit 250 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 680 and attached to the illegal gaming ball When a cheating operation is performed such that an illegal game ball is moved into and out of the first starting opening or the like by operating the string, the force of the illegal game ball fired (hit ball) by the ball firing device 680 makes the fraud After inserting a string attached to the game ball between the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262, a V-shaped narrowed portion formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 Thus, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent acts using the illegal gaming balls attached with the strings.

[3-1 l. Foul cover unit]
The fowl cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of a front cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the rear cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the fall cover unit with the lid removed and seen from the front, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the fall cover with the lid removed and seen from the rear. Furthermore, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid removed.

  As shown in the figure, the fool cover unit 270 is a shallow box-shaped unit body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat cover member attached to the front of the unit body 271 272, and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view and connects the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-ball passage unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper ball supply port 323a of the plate unit 320 A channel 273 and a full tank receptacle 274 which is opened rearward on the lower right side in a front view of the through ball channel 273 and which can communicate with the full channel guide 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 And have.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is opened upward on the right side in front view of the full tank receptacle 274 and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main frame 4 The ball ball receptacle 275 for receiving the game ball (far ball) and the game ball which is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view and received by the full tank ball receptacle 274 and the ball ball receptacle 275 And a ball outlet 276 communicating with the lower ball feed port 323c of the tray unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full ball receptacle 274 and the far ball receptacle 275 and the ball outlet 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of gaming balls. The storage passage 277 having a wide width, the flat plate-like movable piece 278 which constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and the movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting a rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 biasing the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  In the far cover unit 270, when the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls are not released from the ball outlet 276 to the lower plate 322 side, a certain number of them are stored in the storage passage 277 Game balls can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280 by the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full of gaming balls, so that when full is detected by the full detection sensor 279, the payout of more gaming balls is stopped, This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge that the lower tray 322 be completely filled.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the through ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and a door opening / closing door of a lower full ball passage unit 860 in a dispensing unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 is provided which can be in contact with the operation projection 863 e of the door 863 (see FIG. 111). The door opening and closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing abutment portion 281 is formed such that the operation projection 863 e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts. When the actuating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 abuts on the door opening / closing abutment portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotated and the downstream ends of the normal guideway 861 and the full induction passage 862 (front opening ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and operated by the player so that the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 It is.

  The handle unit 300 includes a handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and a handle that covers the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the base 301.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302 and a handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 It has a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 306. And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 held between the base and the steering wheel.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 to return the handle 302 to the initial rotational position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). One end side is attached to the inner base 304, the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is clockwise viewed from the front through the transmission gear 306. Auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 at the rear of inner base 304, tip end is outward from the left side in front view of the front end outer peripheral surface of handle base 301 Protruding and handle on the rear side of inner base 304 with proximal end A single-shot button 311 rotatably mounted on a shaft 301 and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 for detecting a pressing operation of the single-shot button 311; There is.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of a cylindrical base 301a extending in the front and rear direction, a disk-like front end 301b radially projecting from the front end of the base 301a, and a cylindrical base 301a. And three grooves 301c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180. Therefore, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 in a state in which the three grooves 301c coincide with the three ridges 183, and the ridges 183 are respectively inserted in the three grooves 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 can not be rotated relative to the handle attachment member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d, which protrude outward in a circumferential direction away from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting backward from a position inside with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked And a locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side in the clockwise direction of the portion of the handle 302 that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 in a clockwise direction, and bulges outward. The side in the direction of is concaved (curved) to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b most projecting from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most projecting portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction by about a 85 degree rotation angle. Is slightly lower. In the second protrusion 302b, the side surface in the clockwise direction in the front view clockwise bulges so as to expand outward, and the side surface in the direction around the opposite side is curved inward. It is concaved and formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c is located at the most projecting part from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees in the clockwise direction from the most projecting part of the second protrusion 302b. It protrudes at about half height. The side surfaces on both sides of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction which is the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees. It also protrudes slightly high. The fourth protrusions 302 d are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle, with the side surfaces on both sides inclined in a substantially linear manner.

  The handle cover 303 has three round mounting bosses 303 a that are rounded forward on the front and bulge forward. The three mounting bosses 303 a are attached to the front of the handle base 301 by penetrating the slit 302 e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a abuts on the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees of rotation.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle attachment member 180. The handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end is positioned more rearward than the left end in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 to be attached via is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily hold the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can make the user perform the turning operation without feeling a sense of discomfort.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the bat firing device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 is plated with conductive, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. Then, when the handle touch sensor 310 detects the player's touch, when the handle 302 is turned, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the emission solenoid is generated with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 The drive of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be hit. It can not be done. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a method different from the original method, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In the handle unit 300, when the player presses the one-shot button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the one-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the one-shot button 311, and Is omitted to stop the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and, by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 311, the driving before the one-shot button 311 is operated. The game ball can be reentered into the game area 5a by the strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 includes, in the handle 302, four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d, and the handle 302 is rotated most in a clockwise direction in a front view The fourth protrusion 302d positions the first protrusion 302a when the fourth protrusion 302d does not rotate the handle 302 when the game ball is most strongly hit into the game area 5a (so-called "right hit"). Since the fourth protrusion 302d is used as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 at the “right-handed” position in a comfortable state by replacing the fourth protrusion 302d with the first protrusion 302a. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41 (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42 (a) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42 (b) is a perspective view of the pan unit as viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an enlarged explanatory view of a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The plate unit 320 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. On the front surface of the plate unit 320, a rendering operation unit 400 described later is attached.

  The dish unit 320 is provided with an upper dish 321 for storing gaming balls for hitting into the game area 5a, and gaming balls provided under the upper dish 321 and supplied from the upper dish 321 and the far cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 which can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 is attached to a flat plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and to the upper front of the plate unit base 323, and the left side greatly protrudes forward from the left and right center An upper plate main body 324 forming the upper plate 321, and a lower plate main body 325 attached to the left side of the front lower portion of the plate unit base 323 more than the center left and right and bulging forward to form the lower plate 322. And a pan unit cover 326 attached to the front of the pan unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper pan body 324 and the lower pan body 325.

  Further, the dish unit 320 is provided with an upper disc ball removing button 327 mounted so as to be capable of pressing from above in the front view right side of the upper disc 321 on the upper surface of the disc unit cover 326; A ball lending button 328 mounted on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached on the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side in a front view of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328 Ball return indicator 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the and return button 329, and attached to the plate front decoration 326b on the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321 Projected forward from the front of the pan unit cover 326 in front of the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 and the lower tray 322 And it has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side largely bulges forward from the center on the left and right in a front view, and is formed into a container shape opened upward. It is done. In the upper tray 321 (upper tray main body 324), a portion about 1/3 of the width from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges forward most. The upper plate 321 has a front end receding to the rear as it goes to the right in a front view from the most bulging part, and an induction passage portion 321a is formed in which the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter There is. The upper plate 321 is inclined such that the entire bottom surface including the induction passage portion 321 a is lowered at the right end side, and the right end side of the induction passage portion 321 a in a front view (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface is outside the gaming ball from the upper end of the upper plate ball feed opening 323d from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply opening 323a of the plate unit base 323 It is inclined to be lower towards a position slightly lower than the diameter. As a result, the gaming balls discharged forward from the upper ball dispensing opening 323a can be received and stored in the upper tray 321, and the received gaming balls can be received from the right end side of the guiding passage portion 321a. The ball feed port 323d can be supplied.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface of the upper portion 321 is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper tray 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the tray unit cover 326 to which the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper tray 321, a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls can be secured. The upper tray 321 (upper tray main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the tray unit cover 326 so as not to contact with the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A).

  The induction passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding member 321b electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball contacts (rolls) to make the game ball It can remove charged static electricity.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is disposed below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in a front view. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball removing hole 322a which penetrates up and down in the bottom wall and can discharge the game balls, and the plate unit cover 326 And a relief unit 322b for avoiding contact with the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322 b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner thereof is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower tray 322 includes a lower tray main body 325 which is open at the upper side and a rear side, a lower tray cover portion 326k of the lower plate body cover 326 which covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325 The tray unit is formed by the tray unit base 323 closing the back and the lower tray cover 340 covering the upper side of the portion of the lower tray main body 325 projecting into the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a, It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape extending in the right and left directions in a plan view, and a trapezoidal shape whose upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side And the right and left sides of the trapezoidal shape are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases as it goes from the front to the rear in plan view.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower tray main body 325 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper and rear portions are open. The lower bowl body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower countersink hole 322a penetrating up and down with a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides of the quadrilateral extending in the left and right directions are disposed on the front side with the upper side shorter than the base and the rectangular side extending to the left and right. It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid and. The bottom wall 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower countersink hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height twice to five times the diameter of the gaming ball. The lower countersink ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center in the left-right direction of the lower disk main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower tray main body 325, the curved portion of the bottom front wall portion 325a and the main body vertical wall portion 325b in the front right-hand front corner corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

  The lower tray cover 340 is formed to cover the upper right half of the lower tray main body 325. The lower cover 340 is, as shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, substantially formed from a cover upright wall 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and an upper end of the cover upright wall 340a. And a ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover upright wall 340a rises from a portion from the part on the front side of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover upright wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. Further, the front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover upright wall portion 340 a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening portion 326 d of the plate unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling portion 340 b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326 k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower cover 340, a curved surface portion of the cover upright wall portion 340a and a portion obliquely extending between the cover upright wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (rendering operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in the front view near the left end of a portion extending short to the left and right with the front end side. Located behind the. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half thereof turns to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower tray 322 is a lower tray first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 described later Lower tray second area A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326 d (on the front end side of the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the pan unit cover 326, and the lower pan cover 340) Region of and). In other words, half or more of the lower plate 322 is a storage area capable of storing gaming balls (corresponding to a storage area in plan view, a total of the first lower area A1 and the lower second area A2), It is located to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400.

  In the lower tray 322, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right of the center of the rear wall in the front view left-right direction. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 is the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a (right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It is disposed in the lower tray second area A2 which is the rear of the side, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower ball and ball supply port 323c can not be seen from the player through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower tray 322 is formed so as to turn from the lower tray opening 326 d on the left side surface of the tray unit 320 (the tray unit cover 326) bulging forward to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400, The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range viewed from the front. In other words, the lower tray 322 is formed larger in the lower tray second region A2 than in the lower tray first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), it is possible to store more gaming balls in the lower plate 322 more than it looks.

  In the lower tray 322, the right half (lower tray second area A2) in the left-right direction of the lower tray main body 325 protrudes into the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the tray unit cover 326 as shown in FIG. The lower tray cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower tray main body 325 projecting into the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the finger of the player from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in the front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined to be lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The lower ball ball extraction hole 322 a of the lower plate 322 is closed in an openable / closable manner by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower ball ball extraction button 333. Under the normal condition, the lower tray 322 is closed by the cover member 334 and the gaming ball can be stored in the lower tray 322. Then, when the lower disc ball extraction button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the gaming balls in the lower board 322 can be discharged from the lower disc ball extraction hole 332b to the lower side of the disc unit 320.

  The lower countersink hole 322a of the lower tray 322 is disposed in front (directly in front of) the lower countersink supply port 323c of the tray unit base 323 which forms the rear wall of the lower tray 322. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower countersink hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower end opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400, It can not be seen from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed on the front side of the rectangular shape extending to the left and right, It inclines to become lower toward the head. Therefore, with the lid 334 open and the lower countersink hole 322a open, the gaming balls supplied from the lower countersink supply opening 323c into the lower tray 322 are directly in front of the lower countersink supply opening 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the opened lower countersink hole 322a. The lower end of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c, so the lower ball ball supply hole 322a is open. The gaming ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not flow directly to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is located on the left of the right end of the lower ball ball supply port 323c, the game is supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end The ball comes in contact with the portion forming the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. The right standing wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-back direction so as to face the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, so the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it abuts on a sloped part, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower ball open hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower ball open hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower ball open hole 322a. (See Figure 45).

  As described above, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed to guide the gaming balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c is immediately penetrated from the lower ball removal hole 322a without entering the area to the left of the lower ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower ball ball removing hole 322a is kept open, the player can not see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, and the player is paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. The player can play the game by making it difficult for the game balls, etc. to be discharged directly into the dollar box and making it difficult for the game balls to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322. And the effect image etc.) to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, a lid member 334 that closes the lower disc ball extraction hole 322 a may be interlocked with the upper disc ball extraction button 327. As a result, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is opened, so the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl sphere removing button 327 is operated to pull out the gaming bowl from the upper plate 321, the gaming sphere of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl sphere extracting button 333 is not operated. As a result, the player can be strongly illusoryed as if the gaming balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340 constituting the lower tray 322 are shown as separate parts which can be disassembled, but the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Also, although an example is shown in which the cover upright wall 340a of the lower tray cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body upright wall 325b of the lower tray main body 325, the bottom wall 325a of the lower tray main body 325 The cover upright wall 340a may rise. In the example, the ceiling 340 b of the lower cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover upright wall 340 a, but the ceiling 340 b of the lower cover 340 is the main upright wall 325 b of the lower main body 325. It may be extended substantially horizontally from the upper end.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the relief portion 322 b for avoiding the contact of the lower tray 322 with the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400 A) is provided, but the release portion 322 b is not provided The lower plate 322 may be used.

  Further, although the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) in this embodiment is a uniform flat plate without holes penetrating, a plurality of through holes through which the game ball can not pass It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall 325a, the main body standing wall 325b, the cover standing wall 340a, the ceiling 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap where game balls can not pass through. It is good also as what was formed in thing or mesh shape. A light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the plate unit cover 326 (attachment space 326j), and the inside of the lower plate 322 may be illuminated (or decorated with light) through the fence-like or net-like gap of the lower plate 322. .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) which are separately formed. However, the four members may be united in an appropriate combination to form the lower plate 322. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are One united, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrally formed, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, or the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrally formed. A lower plate cover 340, a plate unit base 323 and a plate unit cover 326 integrated with each other; a lower plate body 325; a plate unit base 323; That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
In the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320, an embodiment provided with a ball guiding portion for guiding the gaming ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is a description schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing roughly an example provided with still another different ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  An example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (a) is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate spherical hole 322a at the portion between the lower circular plate feed port 323c and the lower plate spherical hole 322a at the bottom of the lower plate 322 It has a pair of ball guiding parts 322c which are disposed to be separated left and right by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322 c is formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Also, the lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface is lowered toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower ball removal hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding portions 322c without crossing over the ball guiding portion 322c. It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  Then, the lower tray 322 of this example is, similarly to the above, in the rear (lower tray second area A2) on the right side of the lower tray opening 326d of the tray unit cover 326, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball The through holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower disc cover 340 and the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the effect unit 400, the disc unit cover 326 They are not visible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower tray 322 of the present embodiment is provided with the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the gaming ball supplied from the lower peripheral ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower counterball opening 322a is opened. Can be discharged from the lower countersink opening 322a downward (dollar box) immediately without entering the area on the left side of the lower countersink opening 322a in the lower tray 322. Then, since the gaming ball circulating on the lower plate 322 can not be seen from the player side, the gaming ball etc. paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 is illusive as being directly discharged to the dollar box It is possible to make it difficult for the player to concentrate on the game (such as the operation for hitting the game ball and the effect image) by making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322 and to suppress the decrease in interest. Can.

  In the example shown in FIG. 46 (a), the ball guiding portion 322c is shown as a rail, but the invention is not limited to this, and the gaming ball may be lowered like a groove extending toward the lower ball ball opening 322a. Any guide can be used as long as it can be guided to the countersink hole 322a.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 46 (b), the gaming ball released to the right of the lower wall of the lower plate ball opening 322a in the lower plate 322 is diagonally forward right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. In addition to being shaped in such a way as to reflect in the direction of the lower ball ball opening hole 322a, the buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the gaming ball abuts. The buffer portion 322 d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball removal hole 322a just in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game balls discharged straight forward from the lower ball supply opening 323c are discharged from the lower ball removal hole 322a downward (dollar box). On the other hand, the gaming ball discharged to the right front from the lower ball supply opening 323c is reflected by the buffer portion 322d in the direction of the lower ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate removal hole 322a. Be done. At this time, since the gaming ball abuts and reflects on the buffer portion 322d, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Furthermore, the lower tray 322 in this example is also disposed at the rear of the lower right tray opening 326d of the lower tray unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above It is arrange | positioned at the unit mounting part 326a and the back of the covering wall of the front end side etc. of the lower saucer cover 340, and it can not be seen from the front.

  As described above, since the lower plate 322 in this example is provided with the buffer portion 322d on the wall that reflects the game balls, even if the game balls are not released forward from the lower ball supply opening 323c, By the buffer portion 322d, it can be reflected in the direction of the lower countersink hole 322a without sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the clash is also directly discharged to the dollar box because the collision sound of the game balls is not heard from the lower plate 322 By making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation for hitting the game ball and the effect image, etc.) and to suppress the decline in interest. It can be done.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (c), the lower surface of the lower surface 322 (bottom wall) is located above the region opposite the lower surface ball supply port 323c with the lower surface ball opening 322a therebetween. It is provided with a return portion 322e that protrudes to the lower counter ball removal hole 322a and reflects the gaming ball jumping over the lower ball removal hole 322a to the lower ball removal hole 322a side. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may use a shock absorbing material such as rubber or foam that reduces the collision noise at the time of reflection. Further, the return part 322 e may not constitute the side wall of the lower tray 322 or may constitute a part of the side wall of the lower tray 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line sequentially from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 Rearward on the right side of the opening 326d (at the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower operation cover 400, the operation operation unit 400 in the lower operation second area A2, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the lower unit cover 326) It is placed and invisible from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the gaming ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply opening 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side is made by the return part 322e. It can be reflected and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower countersink hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 may be combined with the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d as appropriate. Thereby, the same effect as the above can be exhibited.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the lower tray made dividable, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower tray is expanded according to the size of the space behind the rendering operation unit. FIG. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at a dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second area A2.

  First, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has the lower countersink hole 322a. A main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B attached to the right of the main body portion 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B is the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is accommodated further than the main body portion 325A (the rendering operation unit 400 and the second rendering operation unit 400A It projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases as it goes from the front to the rear. Further, in the first extension portion 325B, a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A is formed at the right front corner.

  Next, in the example of FIG. 47 (b), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward relative to the front end of the lower plate 322, and the effect of the effect operation unit 400 is higher than the example of FIG. The rear space (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wide. The lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) shown in FIG. 47 (b) constitutes a part of the lower tray first area A1 and the lower tray second area A2 and has the lower countersink hole 322a. A main body portion 325A, and a second extension portion 325C attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constituting the remaining portion of the lower tray second region A2 and larger than the first extension portion 325B. As illustrated, the second extension portion 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and a storage area of gaming balls is formed larger than the first extension portion 325B.

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (connected), and the storage areas of the game balls are stored. Will expand. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be splittable, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable. The reservoir area can be made larger or smaller as needed. Further, since the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be split, the projection operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) attached to the tray unit cover 326 protrudes backward (in the mounting space 326j) An expansion unit (a first expansion unit 325B or a second expansion unit 325C) of a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the lower tray second area A2 located behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) has been described as having the dividing line PL arranged, but the dividing line PL is not It may be disposed on the boundary between the first dish area A1 and the lower dish second area A2, or may be arranged in the lower dish first area A1.

  In the above embodiment, the lower disc body 325 (the lower disc 322) is provided with the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a in the main body part 325A, but the first expanded part 325B and the second expanded part 325C are shown. The lower countersink hole 322a may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, the first extension 325B and the second extension 325C are attached on the right side of the main body 325A of the lower tray main body 325, but on the right side of the main body 325A A flat plate-like closing member without a storage area may be attached.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, although the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, the lower plate cover 340 can be divided similarly to the lower plate main body 325, or the first extension portion 325B It may be shaped according to the size of 325C.

[3-3 c. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 and 42 and the like. The plate unit base 323 is attached below the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and has a flat plate shape (the rear is opened) It is formed in a shallow box shape).

  The pan unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner in a front view, and penetrates back and forth under the upper pan and ball supply port 323a, which extends cylindrically rearward. A speaker slit 323b having a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, and a lower circular sphere supply port 323c penetrating longitudinally in the lower part on the left side from the left and right center of the front view and cylindrically extending backward; The lower disc ball supply port 323c has an upper disc ball feed port 323d which penetrates forward and backward in a front view upper right side of the lower disc ball supply port 323c and which extends vertically and whose upper part is positioned at the right end of the upper disc body 324.

  Further, the bowl unit base 323 guides the gaming balls sent to the rear side of the bowl unit base 323 through the upper bowl ball feed port 323d and guides the ball to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250; It extends in a substantially L shape so as to become lower toward the cylindrical right side view of the lower ball and ball supply port 323c after hanging down from the lower side of the feed guide path 323e, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball extraction guide path 323f for guiding the released gaming ball to the lower ball supply port 323c, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball extraction guide path 323f in front view left of the ball feed guide path 323e And an operation transmitting portion 327a which abuts against the actuating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and which is operated by the upper disc ball removing button 327 so as to face the rear. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opening into a cylindrical portion of the lower ball feed port 323c.

  Furthermore, the plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner in a front view, and a handle insertion opening 326f through which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted And a cylinder insertion opening 326g through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 323a of the pan unit base 323 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end is opened to the rear wall of the upper pan 321, and the cylindrical rear end is an upper pan passage port for the door frame base 110 A front end of the through hole 117 is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the far cover unit 270. As a result, the gaming balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 321 through the upper counterspin supply port 323a.

  The lower disc ball supply port 323 c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the lower disc 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower disc passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side And the front end of the ball outlet 276 of the far cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the far cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower ball supply port 323c. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c is disposed at the rear of the stage operation unit 400, the stage operation unit attachment portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the player can not see through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3 d. Dish unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 and 42 and the like. The pan unit cover 326 is attached to the front of the pan unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper pan body 324 and the lower pan body 325. The pan unit cover 326 bulges forward at the center in the left-right direction and opens largely at the center in the left-right direction, and the presentation operation unit attachment portion 326a to which the presentation operation unit 400 is attached and the left and right sides of the presentation operation unit attachment portion 326a A plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed substantially at the same height as the upper plate 321, and a plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed on the lower side of each of the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b There is.

  The rendering operation unit attachment portion 326 a is formed to have a size of about 1/3 of the entire width in the left and right direction of the pan unit 320 in the left and right direction, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height in the vertical direction It is formed in height. In addition, the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so as to move rearward as the front end goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front portion of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the center in the left and right direction of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the end and the left and right sides of the plate unit cover 326 in the left and right direction The middle portion is formed in a curved surface shape slightly bulging forward with respect to a plane connecting the end portion of The lower front end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined to move upward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right sides. It is formed so that the up-down direction may be narrowed toward the left and right both end sides from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side). The dish unit cover 326 has the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left in front view.

  The lower front portion of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that is recessed rearward with respect to a plane connecting the end portion of

  A lower plate opening portion 326d penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed in the lower plate front decoration portion 326c on the left side in a front view, and the lower plate 322 faces the front from the lower plate opening portion 326d. In the lower front dished decorative portion 326c on the left side in a front view, a lower circular ball release button 333 protrudes forward from the lower front surface of the lower lower plate opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker port 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening portion 326d in the lower plate front decoration portion 326c on the left side in a front view. The lower speaker port 326 e is located in front of the speaker slit 323 b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The handle insertion opening 326f which penetrates the back and forth in the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted A cylinder insertion port 326g is formed which penetrates back and forth on the upper side of the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-like top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h It covers the upper right side. An upper bowl ball release button 327, a ball loan button 328, a return button 329, and a ball loan return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The pan unit cover 326 includes a flat plate-like bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the pan front lower decoration portion 326c to the front surface of the pan unit base 323. The lower side of the tray unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. In the bottom plate portion 326i, a portion located below the lower plate 322 is cut away, and the portion is closed by a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later.

  The pan unit cover 326 has a mounting space 326j which is opened forward at a portion of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the pan unit cover 326 extends in a plate shape rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower pan opening 326 d, and includes a lower pan cover 326 k covering the lower pan 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower end cover portion 326k is in contact with the left end at the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower end body 325, and the right end is in contact with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b There is.

[3-3 e. Upper bowl ball release button]
The upper bowl and ball withdrawal button 327 of the bowl unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 in a front view, and pressing the game ball in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 by pressing. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is below the top board portion 326 h by the ball extraction button holder attached to the lower side of the top board portion 326 h of the dish unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis extending to. An upper end of the ball-drawing lever which extends vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper disc ball-extracting button 327. The ball release lever is slidably mounted in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front of the plate unit base 323 below the upper plate ball release button 327.

  The ball release lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the ball release button 327 is in contact with the upper portion of the upper disc ball out slider 327b slidably mounted vertically by the disc unit base 323 from above. . The upper disc ball removal slider 327 b includes an operation transmission portion 327 a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327 a passes through the opening 323 g in the pan unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face, and abuts on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The upper disc ball removal slider 327b is urged upward by the upper disc ball release spring 327c, and the biasing force of the upper disc ball release spring 327c causes the upper disc through the ball removal slider 327b and the ball removal lever. Ball release button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the upper disc ball extraction spring 327 c, the operation transmission portion 327 a of the upper disc ball extraction slider 327 b moves downward, and the operation transmission portion 327 a Since the actuating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in front view, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the opening 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. As a result, the gaming balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 to the ball outlet guiding path 323f of the tray unit 320, and are discharged to the lower tray 322 through the lower ball inlet 323c. It can be (supplied).

  In addition, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a may be moved in an interlocking manner. As a result, when the upper disc ball extraction button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is opened, so the gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 are further removed. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper bowl sphere removing button 327 is operated to pull out the gaming bowl from the upper plate 321, the gaming sphere of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower bowl sphere extracting button 333 is not operated Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel strongly that the game balls on the upper plate 321 are discharged directly to the dollar box, making it difficult for the game balls to feel annoyance passing through the lower plate 322. A decrease in interest can be suppressed by concentrating the player on a game (such as a game ball hitting operation and an effect image). The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3 f. Ball loan button, return button, and ball loan return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the tray unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. As shown in the figure, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display portion 330 have a circular decoration on the right side of the upper plate ball removing button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. Is attached to

  The ball lending button 328 inserts a predetermined number of gaming balls by inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing it. The unit 320 is to be lent (dispensed) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state in which cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or the prepaid card is returned after subtracting the portion of the game ball which has been lent out.

  The ball rental return display unit 330, though not shown, has a 3-digit 7-segment LED arranged on the lower side of the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or It displays an error code etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Effect selection left button and effect selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end close to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left in front view in the plate unit cover 326 as illustrated. The presentation selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed to the left. The presentation selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape in which one vertex is directed to the right on the right side of the presentation selection left button 331.

  The production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 are provided to the player in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. On the other hand, when an effect image prompting selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the desired selection is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3 h. Lower bowl ball release button]
The lower bowl sphere removing button 333 of the bowl unit 320 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 41 and 42 and the like. The lower tray ball withdrawal button 333 projects forward from the lower end of the front of the lower tray decoration part 326c on the left side in a front view on the lower side of the lower tray opening 326d in the tray unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322. The lower disc ball extraction button 333 can be pressed to operate the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball outlet hole 322a of the lower disc 322, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower bowl ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the bowl unit 320.

  The lower disc ball release button 333 can slide in the front-rear direction by the lower disc ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the lower plate body 325 below the lower disc body 325. Is attached to The lower disc ball extraction button 333 is disposed on the left with respect to the lower disc ball extraction hole 322 a of the lower disc 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The lower countersinking base 335 is attached to the bottom plate 326i so as to close the notched portion located below the lower plate 322 in the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The lower countersinking base 335 has a discharge port 335a, which has the same size as the lower countersink opening 322a and is vertically penetrated, at a position immediately below the lower countersink opening 322a for the lower tray 322. . The lid member 334 is disposed between the lower disc main body 325 and the lower disc ball removing base 335, although the detailed illustration is omitted. As a result, when the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball opening hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower ball ball sink base 335 is also opened, and the lower ball ball outlet hole 322a and the discharge port 335a And are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower countersink base 335 so as to be rotatable about a position on the left side of the lower countersink button 333 in plan view. The lower disc ball withdrawal button 333 is connected to a part between the part for closing the lower disc ball withdrawal hole 322 a in the lid member 334 and the part to which the lower disc ball withdrawal base 335 rotatably attached. As a result, when the lower countersunk ball release button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 can pivot around an axis extending in the vertical direction to open and close the lower countersink spherical opening 322a (discharge port 335a).

  Although not shown, the holding device for holding the lower tray ball withdrawal button 333 when the lower bowl ball withdrawal button 333 is pressed and moved to the lower disc ball withdrawal base 335, and the lower bowl ball withdrawal button A lower ball ball release spring biasing the 333 forward is attached. With the lower disc ball release button 333 projecting forward and closing the lower disc ball release hole 322a with the lid member 334, when the lower disc ball outlet button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is The lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is opened to move, and the lower ball ball extraction button 333 is held by the holding device and remains pressed backward. In this state, even if the lower disc ball release button 333 is released, the lower disc ball release button 333 does not move forward, and the lower disc ball out hole 322a is maintained in the open state, and the lower disc The game balls in the ball 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower ball ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower disk ball extraction button 333 is held in the holding device and the lower disk ball extraction hole 322a is open, when the lower disk ball extraction button 333 is pressed backward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the pressing of the lower ball releasing button 333 is released, the lower ball removing button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower ball removing spring and returns to the protruded state, and the cover member 334 is rotated. The lower ball ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed to move. Thereby, the gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition, separately from the pressing operation of the lower disc ball extracting button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower disc ball extracting hole 322 a (discharge port 335 a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper disc ball extracting button 327. The lower countersink hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 321 into the dollar box disposed below the tray unit 320, the dollar box via the lower tray 322 can be operated simply by operating the upper tray ball release button 327. Can be discharged to simplify the labor involved in ball removal. The simultaneous release of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 may be simultaneous release by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneous release by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall Configuration of Production Operation Unit]
The entire configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48 (a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48 (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 49 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line D-D in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line E-E in FIG. 48 (b). Fig.53 (a) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. The rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the front of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present a rendering image to the player It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is formed transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 which the player can press and operate, and the outer periphery of the operation button 410 surrounds the operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. Fig. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operating button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than the height in the vertical direction of the pan unit 320, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a spherical shape so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and an annular button frame attached to the front of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 And a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to pass light.

  The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth spherical shape with no unevenness on the surface side. The button lens 411 is extended in a predetermined length to the center side (inner side) in a state of being recessed in a W shape in cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 and The first button decorative portion 411a and an outer circumferential side of the first button decorative portion 411a are recessed in a circular arc shape in cross section and extend on an axis toward the central side and in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction And a plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b provided.

  The first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 in the assembled state to the operation button 410 as shown, and a group of both right and left sides is a group of upper and lower sides It extends longer than the center.

  The plurality of second button decorative portions 411 b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three by three on each of the left and right sides. The second button decorative portion 411 b is formed to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect that light is refracted by the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface at the first button decorative part 411a and the second button decorative part 411b Therefore, the back side is clearly seen and the contents are.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration parts 411 b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 is provided with a plated layer having a metallic gloss on the surface.

  The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer periphery of the main body 413a, and a plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape along the outer periphery of the body and arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction; A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d projecting in the shape of a band plate to the rear and arranged in the circumferential direction and penetrating the flange portion 413b on the outer side than the main body portion 413a and having a predetermined length along the outer periphery And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and cylindrically extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer periphery of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extension portion 413 f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413 b. The four guide bosses 413c are disposed at positions corresponding to the four corners in the upper, lower, left, and right directions with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. The four guide bosses 413 c are respectively slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be disposed two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These three detection pieces 413 d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided three each on the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 611 b of the button lens 611 and the frame opening 612 a of the button frame 612. In the region of the base opening 413 e in the button base 413, parts of the main body 413 a and the inner extension 413 f are recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extension portion 413 f which is narrowed inward substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging in a spherical shape to the front and is formed transparent so that the display screen of the door frame side effect display device disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front . The operation button 410 is an operation button spring 438 in which four guide bosses 413 c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430 and are inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431. Is biased forward by the Since the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 is in contact with the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, the further movement to the front is restricted. The rear end is moved backward until it abuts on the front surface of the base unit 430 by pressing against it. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the assembled state of the rendering operation unit 400 The gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made less visible to the player by the portion 411a.

  Furthermore, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 by the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is operated by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion visible in the rear is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button of the base unit 430.

  Further, in a state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in the state where it projected backward. Thereby, the button base light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 42 of the decoration substrate unit 420 is a button base It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower decoration The light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the substrate 436 can be prevented from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423b and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration substrate unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper decoration substrate 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being light emitting decorated other than the light emitting decoration target part, and the light emitting decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4 b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 and has a frame-shaped frame main body 416 having a circular central opening 416a, and a frame main body 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front to the frame main body 416 above the central opening 416a. There is.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and which penetrates back and forth, and which penetrates back and forth on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a plurality of (six) peripheral opening portions 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the frame, and notches 416c cut out with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening portion 416a And. The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. Thus, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can be in contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416 b are provided three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416 a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch portion 416 c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  In addition, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylindrical portion 416d, when the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the first LED 422a and 423b and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the left and right upper portions of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (rendering operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attaching portions 416e and the notch portion 416c are attached to the effect operating unit attaching portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 is substantially entirely metal on the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a interposed therebetween. A shiny plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes, from the rear side, outer peripheral openings 416 b formed three on each side of the frame main body 416. The frame side lens 417 is formed to have a smooth surface without irregularities on the front side, and a plurality of irregularities are formed on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 can not be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout 416 c of the frame main body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 is formed to be smooth on the front side. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 can not be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second outer LEDs 422b and 423ab of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423ab, etc. mounted on them are capable of emitting light. .

[3-4 c. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can emit and decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413. It is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 422 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 422 a And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 extends in a circular arc along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 is formed on the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outward of the plurality of first LEDs 423 a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front side and the plurality of first LEDs 423 a And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. Both the front and rear surfaces of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are white.

  The vibration motor 424 has a weight 424a eccentrically attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative substrate unit 420 is assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 is inserted inside the substrate base 421. In the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422 b and 423 b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Moreover, in the state assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is formed between the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 and the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decorative substrate unit 420 causes only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light and decorate by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423. It is possible to emit and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by the light from each of the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, by rotating the weight 424 a of the vibration motor 424, the decoration substrate unit 420 can generate vibration to vibrate the entire rendering operation unit 400.

[3-4 d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58 (a) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as disassembled and viewed from the rear. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation button 410 is mounted so as to be movable back and forth.

  The base unit 430 includes four through holes 431 a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically at the central portion, and a blind hole opened forward outside the through hole 431 a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, an operation button inner decorative member 432 attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and having a short cylindrical extension in the longitudinal direction Of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433 and the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434 which are respectively attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431 a in the front of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432 Manipulations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a at the front of the unit base 431 at the rear A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 respectively inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder Three pressing detection sensors 440 attached to 439 respectively for detecting pressing operation of the operation button 410, a rendering operation unit relay board 441 mounted on the rear side of the unit base 431, and a rendering operation unit relay board 441. And a relay substrate cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is formed slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially rectangular through hole 431 a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431 a has a size that fits in the cylindrical main body portion 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed in a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 are formed at four corners on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the through hole 431 a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413 c of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. The inner diameter of each of the holding holes 431b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted slidably.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b extends from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b disposed at the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  The unit base 431 is a light shielding wall portion 431 c projecting forward in the form of a flat plate from the portion on the upper front surface where the operation button inner decorative substrate 435 is attached and the portion on which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached. Is equipped. The light shielding wall portion 431 c allows the light emitting decoration of the frame top lens 418 to be performed only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so as to close the front end side of the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a which extends in the front and rear direction and the peripheral wall portion 432a. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening portion 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b back and forth and extending vertically, a flange portion 432d extending outward from a rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432 e that project rearward from the rear and are attached to the unit base 431.

  An outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed to have substantially the same size as an inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed in a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is depressed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of first button inner decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction , And is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b and extends in an arc shape such that it has an octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b and concentrically centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b And a second in-button decorative portion 432g (see FIG. 63). The second in-button decoration 432 g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432 c.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The rear end of the operation button inner decoration member 432 can not be clearly seen behind by the lens effect of the first button inner decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side. By emitting light, the decoration member 432 in the operation button can be decorated to emit light. By emitting and decorating the operation button inner decoration member 432, it is possible to cause the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 to emit light and decorate.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting the LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated to emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are each full color LED It is assumed. Also, the front of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button inner inner decoration substrate 435, the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 are white. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431 b in the unit base 431. The guide button spring 438 is a guide boss whose rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431 b in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 400 and whose front end protrudes rearward from the main portion 413 a of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. The operating button spring 438 biases the operating button 410 forward.

  The three pressure detection sensors 440 are disposed at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the unit base 431, one of the three pressure detection sensors 440 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, and the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the remaining one is lower left The sensor holder 439 is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction centering on the center of the unit base 431. The three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect three detection strips 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay substrate 441 is attached on the rear side of the unit base 431 to the right of the through hole 431 a in a rear view. The effect operation unit relay substrate 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, an operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, an operation button inner decoration substrate 435, for relaying the connection between the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, the press detection sensor 440, and the door frame side effect display device 460 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 It is a thing.

  The relay substrate cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay substrate 441 to the left in front view, and includes a leg 442 a attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3, and between the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. Form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Thus, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed downward or hit, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a is in contact with the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted downward, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on 326a and the like to prevent their breakage.

[3-4 e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 54 and 55 and the like. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432 c of the decoration member 432 in the operation button in the base unit 430. While being able to visually recognize a display screen from the front side (player side) through a center part, an effect image can be displayed on a display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front and to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 and to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a bottomed square cylindrical mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof has the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape abuts on the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled in the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decoration member 432 in the operation button (See Figure 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall 432a of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the periphery control board 1510 in the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4 f. Operation effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which part of the operation button is cut away to hide it by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a rendering operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing a perspective view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state which is changed by the game ball being hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player is operated. The player can be made to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 and the player can be entertained.

  The rendering operation unit 400 is formed to have a height substantially equal to the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the full width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the gaming area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. In the effect operation unit 400, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 serving as the bottom surface in a state attached to the dish unit 320 is a gap between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. As attached. Thereby, the rendering operation unit 400 moves the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a spherical shape upward at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line as it goes forward. It is inclined. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the dish unit 320 (rendering operation unit 400) The central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5. Therefore, when the player drops his eyes from the game area 5a to the rendering operation unit 400 (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 or the like in the operation button 410 can be viewed in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide bosses 413 c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431 b of the base unit 430, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. It abuts on a portion near the central opening 416 a in the rear surface of the frame main body 416.

  In the normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the central opening 416 a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 to the center side (central axis line CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in the spherical shape in the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is the center of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. It projects forward from the opening 416 a (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 which bulges forward in a spherical shape.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment is attached. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a spherical shape bulging forward, so from the center of the operation button 410 When the remote position is pressed, the force is dispersed to the whole of the operation button 410 so that the operation button 410 does not easily tilt, and the operation button 410 can be moved straight backward. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be retreated smoothly in a different direction so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. Can be entertained enough.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower front of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper portion is dished so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Because it is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the vibration is generated at the most distant part from the attached portion The whole of the rendering operation unit 400 can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the rendering operation unit 400. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), for the player pressing the operation button 410 The strong vibration can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the pan unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the bottom surface and the bottom plate of the pan unit cover 326 Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck down, the frame is held between the abutment of the lower surface of the leg portion 442a with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The impact can be absorbed by bending downward the attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like. In addition, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted downward, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attachment portion of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on 326a and the like, and damage to the rendering operation unit 400 and the like can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 with a strong force or when the player depresses the operation button 410, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is presented when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400 is presented to the player. Since 400 etc. will not be damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in interest of the player can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side is increased by making the breakage difficult. It can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a spherical shape projecting forward, the strength and rigidity are high as compared to the flat plate shape. While being shocked, even if it is struck hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break it.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation member in the operation button 432 are made of transparent members, the effect operation unit 400 is composed of The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the first button inner decoration 432f, and the second button inner decoration 432g formed on the back side is the front side (the player side Can be viewed from In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the rendering operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the decoration of the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to view the rear at a portion of the outer peripheral edge of the portion to be the inside of the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner circumferential surface of the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation member inner decoration member 432 There is a gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button in-operation decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided in the depressible operation button 410, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the operation button 410 is seen. While being able to prevent the player from having a sense of discomfort, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be disposed within the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, in the rendering operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the in-operation button decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411 a, the second button decoration portion 411 b and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. A unit base 431 and a decoration board unit 420, etc., which are on the rear side (rear side) outside the unit, are formed so as to be invisible to the player through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer edge or the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is hidden and concealed It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the entire rendering operation unit 400.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decorative member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the concavo-convex line of the first button decorative part 411a and the concavo-convex line of the second in-button decorative part 432g intersect with each other, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decorative portion 411a and The second button inner decoration portion 432 g can show the player a geometrical pattern with a deep three-dimensional feel, and can enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

  Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decorative portion 411a and the second in-button decorative portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, the unevenness of the first button decorative portion 411a occurs when the player's eyes move. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g changes, it is possible to show the player a moving decoration, and the player can be entertained.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 allows the player to have a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is located in the operation button 410 (inside of the button frame 412) and behind the in-operation button decoration member 432, the operation button left inward decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inward decoration substrate 434, the operation button The upper inner decorative substrate 435 and the lower operating button inner decorative substrate 436 are disposed, and the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the upper and lower decorative substrates 435 emit light, thereby emitting the inner decorative member 432 in the operating button 410 It can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be lighted and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front of the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436, As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the light is transmitted from the light to the outside of the main portion 413a because it is disposed inside the cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The light emission decoration can be performed well only in the operation button 410.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420. The first LEDs 423a of the first LED 422a and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the six second button decorative portions 411b of the operation button 410 are lighted by emitting the first LEDs 422a and 423a. Can. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 have a cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not leak to the inner side of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, it is located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d in the frame main body 416 of Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the rendering operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. A second LED 423 b of 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, a plurality of frame top lens decoration substrates 437 in the base unit 430 are disposed behind the frame top lenses 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrates 437 The frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light by emitting the LED of From below the portion of the unit base 431 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431 c protrudes forward to the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418 The light from the LED of the top lens decorative substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably decorated by light emission.

[3-4 g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Operation Rendering Unit]
Next, the second effect operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 described above, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63 in the embodiment, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line G-G in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of a part A in FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 instead of the effect operation unit 400 described above. The second effect operation unit 400A, like the effect operation unit 400, allows the player to perform a pressing operation and can present an effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those of the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and is formed transparent at the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 which the player can press and operate, and the outer periphery of the operation button 410 surrounds the dish unit cover 326 A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a; a decoration substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 , The second base unit 450 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decoration board unit 420 attached to the front, and the second base unit 450 visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect table that can be displayed on the screen and can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A has a surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in front view, and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 And a relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in a front view so as to cover the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 and the relay substrate cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422, an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration substrate 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, And, it is for relaying the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4 g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape whose diameter is slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 which is formed in a spherical shape so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and an annular button attached to the front of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 The frame 412 and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided, and substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the rendering operation unit 400. Configuration.

  Specifically, the difference between the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is the pattern of the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

  Describing in detail, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex on the center side of the button lens 411 in a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. A truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles facing one another and a triangle whose one apex is on the opposite side to the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference, and the button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern A rectangular triangle-shaped pattern consisting of a base facing to the center side, a side extending from both ends of the base to the center of the button lens 411, and an oblique side extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base , The hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, the side extending longer than the right triangle pattern from the center of the base of the truss shaped triangle to the center side of the button lens 411, and the tip of that side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in polyhedron shape. Thereby, while the surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth spherical body shape, the back surface side is formed in a polyhedron shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, the first button decoration portion 411a The thickness of the button lens 411 changes intricately at the part of the point of, and the light passing through this part will be irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, it is possible to show the player a geometrical pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined, and at the same time, it is possible to make the rear member difficult to see by irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape whose rear is open. The guide boss portion 413 c is inserted into the holding hole 451 d of the second base unit 450, and is a button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451 d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In the present example, the operation button 410 is mounted so as to be movable back and forth in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4 g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410 and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as that of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given thereto and detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 g-3. Decorative substrate unit]
The decoration substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIG. 69 to FIG. 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front of the base unit below the frame unit 415, and can make the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 emit light and decoration The unit 400 can be vibrated.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is opened, and an operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 attached to the front of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. And a motor cover 425 attached to the front of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decoration substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decoration substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description will be omitted.

[3-4 g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second rendering operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 mounted so as to be able to move back and forth, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached and mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 It is

  The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and a cylindrical guide boss portion 413c projecting from the front surface of the unit base 451 on the button base 413 of the operation button 410 Operation button spring which inserts four cylindrical cylindrical button shafts 452 which are respectively slidably inserted from the inside and four button shafts 452 are inserted to urge the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown) and three pressing detection sensors 454 attached to the front of the unit base 451 and detecting three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b which protrudes hemispherically from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through hole 451c which penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth in a substantially rectangular shape extending up and down when viewed, four holding holes 451d which are recessed backward from the front surface of the main portion 451a, and a main portion 451a An upper bearing 451e recessed in a semicircle (U-shape) from the front to the rear in the upper part of the upper part, and a semicircle coaxial with the upper bearing 451e from the front to the rear in the lower part of the main body 451a The lower bearing portion 451f recessed in a (U-shape) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 is formed to have substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 in which the inner circumference and the outer circumference are formed in a C-shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front of the main body 451a. Cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when screen unit 470 of door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably attached by upper bearing portion 451e and lower bearing portion 451f rotates. There is. The through hole 451 c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A to pass from the rear.

  The four holding holes 451 d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right of the front surface of the main body 451 a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413 c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of each of the holding holes 451 d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413 c, and the guide boss portion 413 c can be inserted. In the four holding holes 451 d, a button shaft 452 is attached coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451 d protrudes more forward than the front surface of the main body 451 a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 410c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be attached slidably in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 410c. Can.

  The upper left holding hole 451 d of the four holding holes 451 d is counterclockwise around the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. The holding hole 451 d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451 d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, among the four holding holes 451 d, the two holding holes 451 d disposed on the lower side are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451 d. .

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451 d, and the front ends of these operation button springs abut on the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413 c, whereby the operation buttons are formed via the guide boss portions 413 c. The 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape in which the front is opened and the rear extends. The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f are coaxially located at the center of the portion extending in a semicircular arc shape. The upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f are inserted with the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460 A from the front, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 from the front side. Can be rotatably supported on the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A by being attached to the front surface of the main body 451a.

  The front surface of each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (face) is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed in the same manner, and is separated in the circumferential direction at a predetermined angle around the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451 g restricts the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by the abutment of the stopper 475 b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  Although not shown, magnets are embedded in the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g and magnetically contact the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b to abut the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b cause the main screen 471 to face forward or the sub screen 472 to face forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the position states, and the movement by which the screen unit 470 tries to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 etc. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three pressing detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at a position corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one of the three pressure detection sensors 454 remains on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals circumferentially around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect three detection strips 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4 g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A has a screen unit 470 rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing 451e and the lower bearing 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base An upper bearing member 480 attached to an upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably attached to an upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450; And a lower bearing member 485 rotatably mounted on the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the screen unit 470 is rotationally driven, and the rotation drive unit 490 attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from behind and mounted is mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 451 so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. Mounted so as to cover the actuating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from the top on the left side in a front view of the box-like projector mounting member 505 open at the front and the rotary drive unit 490 at the top of the second base unit 450 Top cover 506 and the top And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4 g-5 a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending up and down, and the effect image is projected from the projector, The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape, and has a milky white light transmitting main screen 471 and a disk shape whose one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 is a part of the outer periphery, and the central portion is an axis A milky-white, translucent sub-screen 472 that curves to bulge outward in a direction, and a cylindrical shape that protrudes outward in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, and the actuating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially a half of the outer periphery, and the subscreen 472 Sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74 and FIG. 75 etc.) which is formed in the shape of a relief that imitates a predetermined character (dot) to be The sub screen decoration substrate 477 (see FIG. 75 etc.) mounted on the back side of the 472 and having a plurality of LEDs 477a mounted on the side facing the sub screen 472 and the side opposite to the sub screen 472 of the main screen 471 And a semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 extending short from the end of the frame toward the central axis of the main screen.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is formed to have a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 is formed such that its axial length is about 4/3 times as large as the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both axial ends are bordered by the peripheral decoration 472 a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

  The sub screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). . The sub screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and closes the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are arranged circumferentially. And a curved screen portion 472b. The peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472 b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472 and a sub screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are rotatably inserted from the front into the upper bearing 451 e and the lower bearing 451 f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, respectively.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotational drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed substantially along the circumference and the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. A stopper 475b is provided, and a detection piece 475c projecting outward in the form of a flat plate from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 is located in the concave portion 481a which is recessed in a circular arc centering on the axial center of the upper shaft member 473 in the upper bearing member 480 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the concave part 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b in contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and the iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is supposed to be.

  The screen unit 470 can be pivoted between a first position where the main screen 471 is directed forward and a second position where the sub screen 472 is directed forward. The detection piece 475 c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472 b of the sub screen 472. The sub screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness is complexly changed, transmitted light is irregularly refracted in a complex manner, and the rear is viewed It is difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the subscreen decorative member 476.

  The sub screen decoration substrate 477 is attached on the back side of the sub screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub screen 472 and the sub screen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477 a are provided on the front side (the side facing the sub screen 472). Has been implemented. The outer surface of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 is smaller than that of the sub screen decorative member 476, and its surface is white. By emitting the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477, the sub screen decoration member 476 and the sub screen 472 can be lighted and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can cause the LED 477a to emit light, thereby strongly emitting and decorating the "eye" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH".

  Further, since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen 472 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477 a emits light. , And the point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the sub screen decoration substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can cause the sub screen 472 to project the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472. Similar to the peripheral decorative portion 472a, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc. .

[3-4 g-5 b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f which are open forward of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front of 451a. In the state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451 e and the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451, respectively. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 by attaching them to the front surface of the unit base 451.

  The upper bearing member 480 is mounted on the upper portion of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recessed portion 481 a which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The recessed portion of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A, and the screen unit is internally formed. The stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 at 470 is inserted and arranged, and the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 is located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arc-shaped recessed portion 481a allows the stopper 475b of the actuating gear member 475 to rotate favorably between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. ing. Thus, by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed substantially in a flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451 f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 by inserting the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 into the lower bearing portion 451 f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4 g-5 c. Rotary drive unit]
The pivot drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow unit case 491 inside, and the switching drive motor 492 mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and having a rotary shaft protruding into the unit case 491 A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-like first gear engaged with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 The transmission gear (not shown) and the first transmission gear are meshed with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 in the form of a spur gear.

  The second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475 a of the actuating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state where the rotational drive unit 490 is assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotational drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 back and forth around the axis via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be turned.

[3-4 g-5 d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The projector 500 is disposed in the hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by emitting the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cube-shaped projector main body 501 attached to a projector attachment member, and a lens unit 502 projecting forward in a cylindrical shape from the projector main body 501 and irradiating the effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 pass through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side and are disposed in the cover portion 451b. Mounted on

  The projector 500 can project the effect image over substantially the front of the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4 g-5 e. Projector mounting member]
The projector attachment member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 70, FIG. 71 and the like. The projector attachment member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is attached to the inside and attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, and the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410 . The rear wall of the projector attachment member 505 is formed with a plurality of slits 505 a penetrating in the front and rear direction, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505 a.

  A second effect operation unit relay substrate 515 and a relay substrate cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in a front view.

[3-4 g-5 f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 70, FIG. 71, and the like. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated by a rotational angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear in the screen unit 470 The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 have a detection piece 475c at a first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 faces the front, and a second position where the sub screen 472 faces the front. The time detection piece 475c can be detected. The rotational drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotational drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475 c by these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4 g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 70 and 71. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and mitigates an impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, and the plate unit cover in the plate unit 320 It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat buffer member 511 which is in contact with the lower surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 has a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg portions protruding downward from both left and right sides of the main body portion 512a in a front view And 512b. The leg portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the pan unit cover 326 in the pan unit 320 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  In the buffer unit 510, the projector attachment member 505 attached to the base unit 430A compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510 when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward. Move down to The shock absorbing member 511 is compressed to absorb an impact. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 is further moved downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 abuts on the upper surface side of the main body 512 a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the main body portion 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 by the left and right leg pieces 512b, the projector attachment member in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a When the 505 further moves downward, the flat plate-like body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed also by the bending of the body portion 512a. Furthermore, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the downwardly bent main body portion 512a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the pan unit cover 326, and further bending of the body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. Thus, when the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 are strongly hit from the upper side, the impact can be absorbed in multiple steps, and the attaching portion 416 e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit attaching portion of the plate unit cover 326 Unreasonable force can be avoided from acting on 326a and the like to prevent their breakage.

[3-4 g-7. Operation effect of the second rendering operation unit]
The effects of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74 (a) is an explanatory view of the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends in a state in which the main screen of the screen unit is directed forward; (b) is a sub of the screen unit It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned the screen forward. FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen directed forward and is hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going, and (b) shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd rendering operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub screen directed forward and is hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going, and (b) shows the site | part which it is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd rendering operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410, the operation button, or the like in accordance with the game state which changes as the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in 410 to entertain the player, and the player can operate the operation button 410 to cause the player to participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second effect operation unit 400A is formed such that the entire height thereof is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the full width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The rendering operation unit 400 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction below the gaming area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. With the second effect operation unit 400A attached to the plate unit 320, the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is between the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 , A gap is formed. That is, only the upper part of the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is attached to become. Thereby, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a spherical shape is moved forward at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line It is inclined to move upward as it goes. Thus, when the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is disposed above the plate unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A) The central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player, because the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a in the game board 5 being played. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (the operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (the projection from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The door frame side second effect display device 460A or the like in the operation button 410 or the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is inserted in a movable manner and biased forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the second effect operation unit 400A, in the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring. A portion of the rear surface of the frame main body 416 near the central opening 416a.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, in the normal state, the center side (center axis line CL side) of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 goes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 bulging forward in the spherical shape in the operation button 410, the portion projecting forward from the inner periphery (inner side) of the button frame 412 is the center of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415. It projects forward from the opening 416 a (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and (the front end of) the button lens 411 is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

  In the normal state, when the player depresses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 abuts on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the base unit 430A, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 which bulges forward in a spherical shape.

  The operation button 410 is formed so that the outer diameter is very large compared to the operation button for effect provided in the conventional pachinko machine, and therefore the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed It is likely to be More specifically, the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached such that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, while the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of this embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from the upper side as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 The region will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, since the operation button for effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed on a flat surface on which the player performs the pressing operation, the operation button is enlarged while the portion to be pressed is made flat. When pressing a part out of the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is inclined so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button can not recede straight, and the operation button There is a possibility that the pressing operation can not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed and operated by the player has a spherical shape bulging forward. When a position away from the center is pressed, the force is dispersed to the whole of the operation button 410 so that the operation button 410 is difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 can be moved straight backward. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be retreated smoothly in a different direction so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected, and the operation button 410 is pressed. Can be entertained enough.

  In addition, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decoration substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the pan unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate a vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attached part Since it generate | occur | produces, the whole 2nd rendering operation unit 400A can be vibrated large (strongly), and a vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the 2nd rendering operation unit 400A. In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can easily perform the pressing operation (near the upper portion of the operation button 410), the vibration is strong against the player pressing the operation button 410 Can be transmitted to surprise the player and enjoy the presentation.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the bottom plate of the projector attachment member 505 and the plate unit cover 326 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A. A buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body 512a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is multistage due to elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511, bending of the main portion 512a of the buffer base 512, or the like. It can be absorbed, and it can be avoided that an unreasonable force acts on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, etc., and breakage of the second rendering operation unit 400A etc. Can be prevented. Therefore, even when the player presses the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 with a strong force or the like when the player is presented with the effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is performed. Since the button 410 and the second effect operation unit 400A and the like are not damaged, interruption of the game due to the breakage can be avoided, and a decrease in the player's interest can be suppressed, and it is difficult to damage it. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall side.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed and operated by the player is formed in a spherical shape projecting forward, strength and rigidity are higher as compared with the case where it is flat. Even when struck strongly, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decorative portion formed on the back side thereof Decoration by unevenness such as 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, since the plate thickness is changed and light is complicatedly refracted at the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed, it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the decoration of the unevenness is formed .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery to the center side of the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a It is possible to make the rear difficult to look at the outer peripheral portion of the portion to be the inner side of the button lens 411 by the decoration of the concavities and convexities in which the triangles are combined. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis line CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device A gap between the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 is located, but the outer periphery (outside) of the screen unit 470 from the front side (player's side) by the first button decoration 411a located in front of the gap Can make it hard to see. As a result, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A whose position is fixed is provided in the operation button 410 capable of pressing operation, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated, and the operation button 410 It is possible to prevent the player who has seen the game from feeling uncomfortable and to arrange the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. You can do better.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A uses the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like located on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. It is shaped to be invisible. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 directed forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the outer left of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the right of the peripheral decoration member 478 The outer part (in FIG. 76, the part of the cross hatch surrounded by an alternate long and short dash line) is made invisible from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position in which the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the portion outside the annular peripheral decoration 472 a of the sub screen 472 (the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the dashed dotted line in FIG. ) But from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer edge and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 are not easily seen. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and hence the entire second rendering operation unit 400A can be improved.

  In the first position where the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen portion 472 b of the sub screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411 a of the button lens 411, the second button decoration portion 411 b, the button frame 412 and the like. The sub screen decoration member 476 and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are less visible (see FIG. 76). As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the sub screen 472 exists, the main screen 471 can be rotated, etc. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated and switched from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472, the operation is performed. A movement beyond the player's expectation in the button 410 can be made to have a strong impact on the player, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the second position where the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The member 474 is obscured (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub screen 472 (the sub screen decoration member 476) can be rotated, thereby increasing the impact when the sub screen 472 (the screen unit 470) is rotated, The player can be entertained.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display disposed inside the rear of the operation button 410 while having a polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a combining a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range The apparatus 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a and a peripheral decoration member 478 of the sub screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged. Thus, the triangular decoration (first button decoration 411a) disposed on the front side and the quadrilateral decoration (peripheral decoration 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) disposed on the rear side overlap so as to intersect with each other. This makes it possible to show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

  Further, as described above, since the first button decoration 411a mainly composed of a triangle, and the peripheral decoration 472a mainly consisting of a square and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the eyes of the player When the position moves, the degree of overlapping of them changes, so that the geometric pattern that is seen overlapping changes, and it is possible for the player to show the decoration with motion, and the player to make the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth. The player can be entertained.

  Furthermore, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 to direct the main screen 471 forward, or a sub screen 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated vertically and extend vertically. A decoration having a geometric pattern can be shown to the player such that the decoration consisting of a plurality of square weights arranged in a row crosses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape on the button lens 411 . On the other hand, when the sub screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a extends in an annular shape, and a decoration consisting of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern overlapped with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape on the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the player's attention is drawn to the operation button 410 by the change of the decoration, or The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance or the like, and the player can be entertained to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A provides the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410 with the screen unit 470 having different screens that can be switched and the screen unit 470. Since the projector 500 for projecting and displaying an image is provided, an effect image that is completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device can be displayed, and the player can be given a strong impact and enjoyed. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disc-shaped sub screen 472 having a sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center in the center, and the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided separately in the circumferential direction of the rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis.

  In the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned to extend in the left-right direction, from the front It looks like a square (rectangle) extending up and down when viewed (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and the milky white light transmitting property The effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized through the main screen 471 of FIG. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape on the display screen. Thus, while the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the conventional display screen appears to the player And the player can be surprised, the player can be made to pay attention to the main screen 471, and the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be entertained. be able to.

  On the other hand, in the second position where the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the disk-like central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 It appears that the sub screen decoration member 476 imitating a skull is located at the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since a flat and opaque subscreen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the subscreen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the subscreen decoration substrate 477 And the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central part of the rear surface of the subscreen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, in the sub screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub screen 472 can be made to emit light by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub screen 472 The screen decoration member 476 can be lighted and decorated. In addition, by making the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472 can be obscured by the light from the projector 500. The entire side can be brightly decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A emits the LED 477a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 directed forward, and the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on a portion of the sub screen 472 where the shadow of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the portion outside the sub screen decoration member 476 consisting of a decoration imitating a skull The sub screen decoration member 476 which becomes the inner side of the light emitting decoration is emitted by the LED 477 a of the sub screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the light emission decoration of the fixed sub screen decoration member 476 is decorated by the effect image (moving image), and a decoration effect which is completely different from the light emission decoration of the decoration member in the conventional pachinko machine While being able to show to a player and giving a strong impact to a player, a player can be made to pay attention to the subscreen 472 strongly. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a is brighter (at high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, and thus a partially high-intensity effect image which can not be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device Can be displayed, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and, at the same time, it is possible to display an effect image that makes the player more entertaining.

  Thus, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Since the player can show the player a decoration with a three-dimensional effect by the movement, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A can emit light such as an effect image or the like to the front of the sub screen decoration substrate 477 on the front surface of which the LED 277a is mounted in the back of the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400 is A, the operation button left outer decoration in the decoration substrate unit 420 behind the second button decoration portion 411b that faces from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410 The first LED 422a of the substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decorative portions 411b of the operation button 410 are emitted by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. It can be decorated. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 have a cylindrical main portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit Since the light from the first LED 422a, 423a does not leak to the inner side of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d, it is located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d in the frame main body 416 of Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be lighted and decorated favorably.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is located behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside The second LEDs 423 b of the decorative substrate 423 are disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated to emit light by causing the second LEDs 422 b and 423 b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 are between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416 It is located, and the light from the second LED 422b, 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be well decorated. .

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415. By emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decorative substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated with light emission.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens different in form from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed behind the inside of the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that can not be realized with a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (is switched). Can give the player a strong impact and enjoy it.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 78 to 81. Fig. 78 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line L-L in FIG. 78 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is located on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the front side of the door frame upper left side decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 above the plate unit 320. It is attached to the front left side. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in a front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusion lens member 532 attached to the front, and a translucent unit disposed in front of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit mounted on the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and projecting like a cylindrical frame to the front and extending vertically It is attached to the lower part of the front of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the decorative base 534 and the left unit decorative lens member, and it is on the left unit. To cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the left unit lower decoration base 535 projecting forward in a frame shape shorter than the decoration base 534 A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape whose rear side is opened, and has a plurality of openings 531 a penetrating in the front and rear directions on the front surface. The plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and rectangular holes extending vertically as shown. The left unit base 531 includes the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face the front. Each of the openings 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed such that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially at the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided up and down into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a square lens 532a in a front view, which corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square in a front view, which corresponds to a square opening 531a. And a lens unit 532b. In the state where the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed at the rear can be emitted forward in a point-like manner by the circular lens portion 532a. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

  The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffusion reflection portion 532c which is recessed in a conical shape at the center of the front surface and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c at the front surface. , The input lens portion 532e bulging backward in the form of a curved surface at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusive reflection portion 532c), and as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e as a whole on the outside of the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface And a front reflector 532 f inclined to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532 d of the rectangular lens portion 532 b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 532 c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is arched backward in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the ridge portion between the grooves is forward It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflection portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed in a sawtooth shape in which a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed into a triangular shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is pointed rearwardly. The front reflection portion 532 f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center is increased. Further, the front reflection portion 532 f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The circumferentially dividing radially extending lines coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532 d.

  In the square lens portion 532b, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens portion 532b, light irradiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens portion 532e into the rectangular lens portion 532b. Since this input lens portion 532 e is bulging back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161 a and 162 a is refracted so as to advance in parallel in the forward direction. Substantially all can be directed to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. The light guided to the central diffusive reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending back and forth (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffusive reflector 532c. In the square lens portion 532b, and travels from the center side to the outer side along the front surface. The light reflected by the central diffusive reflector 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in a direction away from the center line of the central diffusive reflector 532c) over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens 532b.

  When light reflected inside the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection portion 532f, the front reflection portion 532f faces the front Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflection portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface moves away from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner (See Figure 81). As a result, light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the square lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes from the center side to the outside. It can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532 f is irradiated forward from the square lens portion 532 b through the front diffusion lens portion 532 d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532 d is formed to have a wave-like cross section, it can diffuse light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532 f in various directions, and the square lens portion 532 b Light can be emitted to the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

  The square lens portion 532b is divided into a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending grooves in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, and then a plurality of concentric circular arc grooves bordering the dividing line. Of the circular arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has concentric stripes of light and shade. Light can be avoided, and more uniform light can be emitted forward. Thereby, the multi-faced decorative part in front of the square lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be lighted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the front of the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 And a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and which extends short in the front and back direction. In the multifaceted decorative part, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front of a rectangular solid extending in the vertical direction, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular solid. It is formed in the same shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-sided decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561 a and the multi-sided decorative portion 561 b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player's side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. In the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faced decorative portion is moved forward from the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 by the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. Each of the lights is decorated by light emitted.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and is formed in a square tube shape extending in the front and rear direction. In the left unit upper decoration base 534, a portion constituting the lower surface in the outer periphery is inclined so as to protrude downward as going from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates forward and backward. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U-shape which is opened upward in a front view. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined from the substantially vertical center at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves upward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion of the left unit upper decorative base 534 is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534; A V-shaped portion whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 and a lower end of the upper V-shaped portion and an upper end of the lower V-shaped portion are connected And a linear portion.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at the upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82 to 86 and the like. Fig.82 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line M-M in FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line O-O in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is a box-shaped right unit base 551 mounted on the front of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in a front view and a front surface of the right unit base 551. And a transparent flat plate attached on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and extending in the vertical and horizontal directions Of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the sheet right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and the right unit left decoration member 554 Transparent flat right unit left cover 55 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side It has a, and.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side and a right unit left diffusion lens from a front view center on a front surface of the right unit base 551 in front view right of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the up and down direction and a sheet attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and decorated Right unit right decorative member 557, and a transparent flat right unit right cover 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a shallow box shape extending in the up and down direction with the front and right opened. Non-translucent right unit left light shield member 559, and right unit right diffusion lens member 556 on the left side of the right unit left light shield member 559 attached so as to close the open right side And a right unit right light shielding member 560 in the form of a flat plate.

  In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 penetrating back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 mounted on the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 mounted on the front side of 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to penetrate the right unit base 551 up and down, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570 A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay substrate 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a rectangular shape which is elongated in the vertical direction in a front view, extends in a short and short rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape closed near the center in the longitudinal direction. It is done. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in the shape of a vertically extending band plate. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted at the center in the left-right direction at the front in the left-right direction with a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left from the center in the left-right direction at the front And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for emitting and decorating the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552 b is for emitting and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552 c is for emitting and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

  Both front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided up and down into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B is connected to the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A is a door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusion lens member 553 includes: a flat main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction; and a rear wall portion 553b short in a plan view right short in plan view from the rear side of the main body portion 553a; The right unit left decorative member is notched in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left and formed in plural in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the left side of the main portion 553a in front view An accommodation recess 553d which is recessed so as to be able to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 553a in a front view And a plurality of side reflectors 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the rectangular shape extending vertically is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side goes upward as it goes to the front It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the whole of the main body portion 553a moves with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view from the rear end side. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553 b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall 553b.

  The plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a portion thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emit the right unit decoration lens member 561 It can be decorated.

  The bottom of the accommodation recess 553 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553 e are projected rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 553 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion where the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. The input lens portions 553 e are respectively located immediately in front of the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side surface reflecting portions 553 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side surface reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centering on the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric circular arc grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion It extends perpendicularly to the plane of the surface 553a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflection portion 553f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e, with the mountain portion between the grooves facing the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with the radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as boundaries. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, light emitted forward from the left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553 e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and in the main portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the vertically extending line of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole moves forward in the front view, the door frame right side The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main portion 553a strikes the flat left surface in the main portion 553a. However, direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the main portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main portion 553a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in a front view by striking the saw-like side reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (right side in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, the right unit left light shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left through the main body portion 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side are left at the left surface of the right unit left light blocking member 559 The light reflected to the left and transmitted through the main body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, so that the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a emits light and decorates with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided into a plurality of radially extending grooves, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated to the outside (left) from the left surface of the main body portion 553a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. It is possible to irradiate the left with more uniform light. Thus, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553 d on the left surface of the main body portion 553 a can emit and decorate substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the left side in the front view of the main body portion 553a (the side on which the accommodation recess 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. The side portion can be decorated by the side reflection portion 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decoration member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a flat main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and longitudinal directions, and a rear wall short in a plan view left from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. A portion 556b and a plurality of notches 556c which are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in the front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction A front view of the main body portion 556a, an accommodation concave portion 556d recessed so as to be able to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, an input lens portion 556e projecting backward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a A plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are disposed in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view, with the upper corner of the front end side of the rectangular shape extending up and down being beveled in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side going upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same as that of the main body portion 553a. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the whole of the main body portion 556a moves with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the left in front view from the rear end side. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556 a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 556 b is assembled with the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end thereof extends to approximately the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts on the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. That is, the plurality of cutouts 556 c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553 c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening which is penetrated back and forth by the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 The inner LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c can favorably emit and decorate the right unit decoration lens member 561.

  The bottom surface of the accommodation recess 556 d is formed to be a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decoration member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556 e project rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556 a at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, they are formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is equally divided into six in the vertical direction. The input lens portion 556 e is, although not shown in detail, recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in which the vertically extending quadrilateral protrudes backward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. There is a site. These input lens portions 556 e are respectively located immediately in front of the right LED 552 b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

  A plurality of (six) side reflectors 556 f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main portion 556a in each groove, and the surface remote from the input lens portion 556e is the main portion It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed in a triangular shape whose cross-sectional shape is sharp when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e such that a mountain portion between the groove and the groove is directed to the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. In addition, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, with radial lines dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 enters the main portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted so as to be spread by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e is formed in the main portion 556a. It spreads radially toward the front centering on the

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the vertically extending line of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole moves forward in the front view, so the door frame right side The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main portion 556a will strike the flat right surface in the main portion 556a. However, direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side surface reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in front view by striking the saw-like side reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right through the main body portion 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the left side Since the light reflected toward and transmitted through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 mounted on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by the radially extending plural lines, and then the concentric circular arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form concentric circular arc grooves. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light having concentric stripes and shading. Can be emitted to the right with more uniform light. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556 d on the right surface of the main body portion 556 a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body portion 556a (the side on which the accommodation recess 556d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be seen through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decoration member 557 Parts can be decorated by the side reflectors 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo along the concept of the presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Is applied to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations provided to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape as the side unit of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front and right sides are open. The right unit left light shielding member 559 has a flat main body 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front and rear direction, a rear wall 559b short in a plan view right from the rear side of the main body 559a, and a rear A plurality of notches 559c which are cut in a rectangular shape from the right end side in the front view of the wall 559b to the left and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction and extend from the right surface of the main body 559a to the right And a plurality of flat plate-like reinforcements 559 d extending from the wall 559 b to the front end of the main body 559 a.

  The main unit 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending rectangular is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side is upwardly directed toward the front It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and its outer shape is formed in substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the main body portions 553a and 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

  The left end of the rear wall 559 b extends to the right more than the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. That is, the plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552 c favorably emits the right unit decorative lens member 561. It can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in a pair at a height substantially the same as the width of the left and right, and three pairs of the reinforcing portions 559d are spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 in the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of the vertically extending square is notched like a C-chamfer and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines, and is formed in the substantially same shape as the main-body part 559a in the right unit left light-shielding member 559. As shown in FIG. The right unit right light shielding member 560 can close the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. .

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. And the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Thus, the main body portions 559a and 560a are separated in the left-right direction, and a space extending in the top-bottom direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed. The light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is irradiated to the rear side of the right unit decoration lens member 561 through the space formed between the main body portions 559a and 560a.

  In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of non-light transmitting members, and are emitted forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame Lights are prevented from interfering with each other, and the left LED 552a, the right LED 552B, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 respectively correspond to each other. The light emission decoration can be performed only by the middle LED 552c.

  Furthermore, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind the respective divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559 d. The light can be prevented from interfering between the spaces by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 which is located, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be , Each can be decorated independently luminous. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide into plural (four) areas in the vertical direction and emit and decorate each of them independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed along the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and having a plurality of polyhedrons formed thereon. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is depressed and extends short back and forth. In the multifaceted decorative part 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal parts are vertically arrayed on the front face of a rectangular solid extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons consisting of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular solid part. It is formed in the shape as it was set.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561 a and multi-faced decorative portions 561 b respectively divided into four spaces by three reinforcing portions 559 d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the portion located forward, in the three portions from the top, the multifaceted decorative portions 561b are arranged one by one on the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged at the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost portion, It is formed so that only the multi-faced decorative part 561b is disposed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated to emit light by the inner LED 552 c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 disposed at the rear.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in the shape of a cylindrical frame penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape following the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and can visually recognize the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side from the front side.

  The decoration member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects largely in the form of a plate to the front beyond the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly to the front from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the pan unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently separates the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on the left and right both sides which are protruded and the right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. Can be made to emit light.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right with the pachinko machine It is possible to exert an operational effect such as partitioning between the two. In this way, it is possible for the player playing a game with the pachinko machine 1 to feel as if playing in the private room, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without disturbing other players around. Can.

  In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 largely protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if it is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, an island facility The pachinko machine 1 can be made visible in the game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged in a row. Therefore, when the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are lighted and decorated, the present from a distance, even if not located in front of The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball clog or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 emit light in a unique manner on both right and left sides. By making it decorate, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the attendants of the game hall, and it becomes possible to respond quickly to the defect, thereby interrupting the player's game. The problem can be solved early, and the player can be frustrated to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.
[3-6-2. Second embodiment of door frame right side unit]

[First embodiment of decorative sheet]
As a kind of decoration sheet (the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557) housed in the door frame right side unit 550, a sheet in which a pattern can be always seen (hereinafter referred to as a pattern sheet) or a light is irradiated By doing this, it is possible to select various sheets such as a sheet whose design can be visually recognized, but in the present example, a light guide whose pattern drawn by irradiating light from the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 can be visually recognized The sheet is used as a decorative sheet.

  In addition, when the decorative sheet is housed in the door frame right side unit 550, if light is not incident on the decorative sheet, the portion where the pattern is drawn also has transparency, so the pattern It is difficult to see the In order to facilitate visual recognition of the pattern, a door frame right side decorative substrate 552 on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged is used. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 of this example is for directly entering light on the decorative sheet from the rear, and is disposed at a position facing the side portion 554 a of the decorative sheet in the door frame right side unit 550. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 174 to 179.

  FIG. 174 (A) is a perspective view of the right unit left decorative member 554 as viewed from the front. (B) is the perspective view which looked at the right unit left decoration member 554 from back. (C) is the perspective view which looked at the right unit right decoration member 557 from the front. (D) is the perspective view which looked at the right unit right decoration member 557 from back.

Further, the outer surface portion 554b and the outer surface portion 557b do not include the lower end portions of the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 described later (locations where the notches are provided).
In addition, the right unit left decoration member 554 is a light guide sheet in which a pattern is exposed toward the player, and the right unit right decoration member 557 is a light guide in which the pattern is exposed toward the opposite side to the player It is a sheet.
Since the structures of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 are common to each other, the right unit right decorative member 557 will be described here, and the description of the right unit left decorative member 554 will be omitted.

  For example, in the case of using a light transmitting sheet having a simple transparency without a picture etc. as a decorative sheet, when light is incident from the side portion 557a toward the inside of the decorative sheet, the light does not go out from the outer surface portion 557b , Escaping from the opposite end of side 557a. This results from the nature that light travels repeatedly in the interior of the decorative sheet. In the decoration sheet of this example, a process of changing the reflection angle of light in total reflection is applied to the outer surface portion 557b, and by the process, the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the player in the game board 5 The logo is decorated in line with the concept of presentation presented to the. As a result, light is emitted from the outer surface portion 557b of the decorative sheet, and it is possible to make the pattern stand up.

Next, when light is irradiated to the side portion 557a by the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, a structure in which the decoration processed into the decoration sheet is raised will be described using FIG.
FIG. 175 is a view for explaining a light path inside the right unit right decoration member 557. As shown in FIG.

A fine linear uneven portion 557d is formed on the inner surface portion 557c of the right unit right decorative member 557 by processing, and light is incident from the side portion 557a by the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, and the light is illustrated. As shown in 175 light path L1 and light path L2, total reflection is repeated in the right unit right decoration member 557, and when light travels to the uneven portion 557d, the irregular angle is changed by changing the incident angle by the uneven portion 557d. , And emitted from the outer surface portion 557b. Therefore, due to the presence of the concavo-convex portion 557d, the design (see FIG. 174) formed on the right unit right decorative member 557 floats up in a visible manner.
In FIG. 175, for convenience of explanation, the dimension of the concavo-convex portion 557d with respect to the thickness of the right unit right decorative member 557 is shown larger than the actual dimension.

Next, the form of the door frame right side unit 550 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 176 is a perspective view showing the door frame right side unit 550 in a disassembled state. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a decorative sheet determination member 565, a right unit right cover 558, a right unit left cover 555, a partition plate 566, and a door frame right side decorative substrate 552, and the partition plate 566 and the right unit right The right unit right decoration member 557 is disposed between the cover 558 and the right unit left decoration member 554 is disposed between the partition plate 566 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, since the decorative sheet is a transmissive member as described above, the partition plate 566 employs a member having a low light transmittance. The right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member are emitted when a plurality of LEDs disposed on the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 emit light if the partition plate 566 is a member having a high light transmittance. It is because the pattern with 557 will be seen overlapping.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is disposed opposite to the side (side 554a and side 557a) of the decorative sheet and the side (described later) of the partition plate 566, and the irradiated light is the decorative sheet. And the side of the partition plate 566. In addition, the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 includes LED substrates 5520a to 5520d, and the LEDs arranged in each row correspond to the two decorative sheets and the partition plate 491c. The LED board 5520a is the side 554a of the right unit left decoration member 554, the LED board 5520b is the side 566a of the partition plate 566 on the right unit left cover 555 side, and the LED board 5520c is the right unit right cover 558 in the partition plate 566 The side portion 566a on the side and the LED substrate 5520d correspond to the side portion 557a of the right unit right decoration member 557, respectively, and can emit light individually.

  Also in the decorative sheet of this example, the notch pattern applied to the lower end of the decorative sheet and the discrimination sensors 565a to 565 provided on the decorative sheet discrimination member 565 correspond to the model of the game machine. It is determined whether or not a decorative sheet is inserted. The lower end portion of the decorative sheet also has the same transparency as other portions, so the light receiving element detects the light emitted from the light emitting element even if the portion not subjected to the notch processing faces the judgment sensor. Since there is a risk of shrinkage, the surface of the lower end is roughened to block light from the light emitting element.

In addition, in the interior of the decorative sheet discrimination member 565, at a position facing the lower end portion of the decorative sheet, whether the decorative sheet accommodated in the door frame right side unit 550 is a picture sheet or a light guide sheet A sheet type discrimination sensor 565f (optical sensor) for discriminating is provided. When the stored decorative sheet is a design sheet, the part facing the sheet type discrimination sensor 565f is accommodated as an impermeable member, and by facing the sheet type discrimination sensor, "on" or "off" It is configured to be switched and detected. In the case of the light guide sheet, the sheet type discrimination sensor 565f is not detected by setting the portion facing the sheet type discrimination sensor 565f when it is accommodated as a member having transparency.
That is, it is determined that the design sheet is accommodated in the door frame right side unit 550 by being detected by both the decorative sheet detection sensor 565e and the sheet type discrimination sensor 565f. On the other hand, when it is detected by the decorative sheet detection sensor 565e and not detected by the sheet type determination sensor 565f, it is determined that the light guide sheet is accommodated in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is configured to switch the LEDs to be emitted depending on whether the decorative sheet accommodated in the door frame right side unit 550 is a picture sheet or a light guide sheet. When it is determined that the light guide sheet is accommodated, the LED substrates 5520a and 5520d emit light, and the side portions (554a and 557a) of the light guide sheet are irradiated with light to be processed into the surface of the light guide sheet I let the pattern come up. When it is determined that the picture sheet is stored, the LED boards 5520b and 5520c emit light, and the side portions 566a of the partition plate 566 are irradiated with light, and the player's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the game board 5 The picture sheet on which the logo etc. are drawn according to the concept of the presentation to be presented is decorated with light. Hereinafter, the configuration in the case where light is incident on the partition plate 566 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 177 is a top view showing the internal structure of the partition plate 566, in which a reflecting plate 5661 having substantially the same shape as the partition plate is provided, and on the surface facing the inner surface 554c and the inner surface 557c of the decorative sheet. The rough surface 5660 is provided. When light is incident from the side portion 566 a, the light enters into the inside of the partition plate 566, and the light is reflected to the rough surface portion 5660 by being directed to the reflecting plate 5661. When light travels to the rough surface portion 5660, the incident angle is changed by the rough surface portion 5660 to diffusely reflect light, and light is emitted. Therefore, the presence of the rough surface portion 5660 improves the visibility of the decoration drawn on the outer surface portions 554b and 557b in order to embellish the inner surface portions 554c and 557c of the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557. It can be used as a backlight. Thereby, since both a picture sheet and a light guide sheet can be used as a decoration sheet, it is possible to enhance the versatility of advertisement using the door frame right side unit 550.

  In addition, a structure for preventing light emitted from a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 from being diffused to portions other than the corresponding members is described with reference to FIG. 178A. . FIG. 178 (A) is a top view of the door frame right side unit 550. FIG.

  A light shielding plate 567 which does not transmit light is provided between the LED substrate 5520a and the LED substrate 5520b and between the LED substrate 5520c and the LED substrate 5520d in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, as shown in FIG. 178A. When the LEDs emit light, only the light guide sheet and the partition plate 566 corresponding thereto are irradiated with the light emitted from the LED substrates 5520a to 5520d.

[Second embodiment of partition plate]
Although it has been described that the rough surface portion 5660 is provided on the surface of the partition plate 566 facing the inner surface portion 554c and the inner surface portion 557c of the decorative sheet, the present invention is not limited thereto. The partition plate 566 in this example is an opaque plate member, and inside thereof has a passage of light emitted from the overhanging LED substrate. This will be described below with reference to FIG. 178 (b).

FIG. 178 (b) is a top view showing the internal structure of the partition plate 566.
The partition plate 566 is a member for back light which improves the visibility by allowing light to enter from the side portion 566a of the partition plate 566 when the design sheet is accommodated in the door frame right side unit 550 among the decorative sheets. In order to use it, the inside is provided with the light guide path 5562 which guides the light irradiated from the door frame right side decoration board | substrate 552 to inner surface part 554c, 557c of a decoration sheet.
The light guiding path 5662 is a light entrance portion 5663 as an entrance of light irradiated from the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a light exit portion 5664 as an exit hole for guiding light to the inner surface portions 554c and 557c of the decoration sheet. , And the light incident on the light entrance portion 5663 passes through the light guiding path 5662 and exits from the light exit portion 5664 so that the light is guided to the inner surface portions 554c and 557c of the decorative sheet. .
The light emitting portion 5664 is provided as a large number of holes in the entire surface portion of the partition plate 566 (opposite to the inner surface portions 554c and 557c of the decoration sheet), and illuminates the entire inner surface portions 554c and 557c of the decoration sheet without unevenness. When viewed from the outer surface portions 554b and 557b, the visibility of the pattern is improved. In addition, the light exit portion 5664 has a diameter such that the hole is not noticeable when viewed visually, and looks like a so-called opaque plate member, so the light guide sheet having transparency serves as a decoration sheet and the door frame right side Even in the case of being accommodated in the unit 550, the visibility of the decorative sheet is not deteriorated due to the large number of the light output portions 5664.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is not limited to the one that accommodates the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 one by one, and a plurality of decoration sheets may be stacked (three in this example). Sheet) may be accommodated. As described above, since the light guide sheet has a structure in which the design comes to light when light is incident from the side, even when a plurality of decorative sheets are stacked and accommodated, they correspond to the respective decorative sheets. By arranging the LED substrates to be opposed to the side, it is possible to make the pattern stand up individually. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 179 is a view showing only the LED substrate corresponding to the right unit right decoration member 557 accommodated in the door frame right side unit 550 and the right unit right decoration member 557 in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552.
In this example, a first light guide sheet 5574 processed with a pattern simulating a starry sky, a second light guide sheet 5575 processed with a pattern simulating a fireworks, a third light guide sheet processed with a pattern resembling a mountain range A door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is disposed facing the side of each of the decorative sheets, with 5576 stacked and housed between the right unit right cover 558 and the partition plate 566.

The door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is configured to switch the target to which decoration sheet the light is incident to each decoration sheet according to the game state.
For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is not played by a player, or is played by a player, in a normal gaming state, light is incident only on the third light guide sheet 5576, and a pattern imitating a mountain range Float up. Moreover, when the variation mode of the special symbol is a variation with reach, the first light guide sheet 5574 is substituted for the third light guide sheet 5576 in response to the change with the reach being performed. Light is incident, and a pattern imitating a starry sky floats up above the mountain range. Furthermore, when performing an effect indicating that a jackpot state has been made, light is incident on the second light guide sheet 5575 instead of the first light guide sheet 5574 to make a pattern imitating a firework float up.

  As described above, when the player or another hole customer visually recognizes the door frame right side unit 550, the present gaming state can be determined at a glance by the configuration in which the decoration sheet to which light is incident is switched depending on the gaming state. By arranging and storing a plurality of light guide sheets, it is possible to float up a plurality of types of pattern patterns, unlike the pattern sheet, so rendering and advertising by the door frame right side unit 550 does not become monotonous, It can be hard to get bored.

  In addition, light does not have to be made to selectively enter each decorative sheet, and for example, light may be made to enter to a plurality of decorative sheets according to the game state. When the pachinko machine 1 is not played by the player or played by the player, in the normal gaming state, light is incident only on the third light guide sheet 5576, and a pattern imitating a mountain range is displayed. Make it float. Moreover, when the variation mode of the special symbol is a variation with reach, it is added to the third light guide sheet 5576 with respect to the first light guide sheet 5574 when the variation with the reach is performed. Light is incident, and a pattern imitating a starry sky floats up above the mountain range. Furthermore, when performing an effect indicating that a jackpot state has been made, light is made incident on all the light guide sheets, and in addition to the mountain range and the starry sky, a pattern imitating a firework is floated up.

As described above, as the gaming state becomes a so-called hot state, the patterns that come up increase, so by making the player visually recognize the appearance of the presentation gradually, other than giving a feeling of expectation for a big hit, for example, it develops into a big hit state. As it is possible to make other hall customers aware of the state of the effect that indicates that the probability of being played is high and the effect that indicates that the jackpot state has been made, it is possible to gather sight lines and the pachinko machine 1 can select Sex has also improved.
In addition, since each decorative sheet is accommodated in a stack, when light is incident on a plurality of decorative sheets, it appears as a three-dimensional pattern, and therefore, it is compared with the one that floats the pattern of one decorative sheet. Decoration is improved.

  In addition, since a plurality of decorative sheets can be stacked and accommodated, a decorative sheet corresponding to the type of game board 5 and a decorative sheet corresponding to the type of gaming board 5 are overlapped to form the door frame right side unit If it is configured to be housed in 550 and, for example, a place where a common decoration sheet corresponding to the model of the game board 5 is accommodated is accidentally stored a decoration sheet corresponding to another model, the above-mentioned error information is made into a hall The light is made incident on the corresponding common decoration sheet regardless of the type of the game board 5 while informing the attendants of. As a result, even if an incorrect decorative sheet is contained, the operator of the hall is notified of error information indicating that the incorrect decorative sheet is contained, regardless of the model. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the pattern processed into the common decorative sheet, so that it is possible to prevent the incorrect decorative sheet from being left as it is inserted, and the advertisement by the door frame right side unit 550 Without losing the effect, to suppress giving misunderstanding and discomfort.

  In the above, the example using the light guide sheet as the decoration sheet has been described, but the configuration is not limited to the above. For example, regardless of the effect, the decoration sheet to which light is incident is changed at fixed time intervals. Because the symbols that can be viewed from the door frame right side unit 550 are alternately switched like a slide show, a variety of information can be obtained for the player and the other as compared with a device that raises a single symbol and advertises. It will be visible to hall customers, and the possibility of selecting the pachinko machine 1 can be further improved. Besides, the decoration sheet for receiving light may be optionally selected by a person in charge of the hole, and various methods can be appropriately selected.

In addition, although the structure which used sheet-like members, such as a pattern sheet and a light guide sheet, as a decoration sheet was demonstrated until now, it does not restrict to this, For example, a plate-like decoration board (pattern board, light guide plate) is used Also, various configurations can be selected.
In addition, the decorative sheet discrimination member 565, the right unit right cover 558, the right unit left cover 555, the partition plate 566 and the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 constituting the door frame right side unit 550 are all integrally formed. Even if it is, it may be a thing formed by combining separate members, and it can be selected suitably.

  In addition, light enters the door frame right side unit 550 by lighting of the game hall and LED light emission other than the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, and a pattern processed into a decoration sheet is displayed on the decoration sheet (light guide sheet). An opaque seal or member is disposed at a position other than the side portions 554a and 557a, the outer surface portions 554b and 557b, and the inner surface portions 554c and 557c in the decorative sheet so that light does not transmit. . Thereby, although the light is not irradiated by the door frame right side decoration board 552, the possibility that the design processed into the decoration sheet may be exposed can be prevented. In addition, the decorative sheet determination member 565 is formed of a member that does not transmit light, or light transmission is transmitted to portions of the right unit left cover 555 and the right unit right cover 558 other than facing the outer surface portions 554b and 557b of the decorative sheet. Various methods may be selected as long as light is not incident on the decoration sheet other than the light emission decoration by the door frame right side decoration substrate 552.

[3-6. Third embodiment of door frame right side unit]
The bowl unit 320 deducts the ball lending button 328 for lending the game ball to the player within the range of the cash put into the ball lending machine and the balance of the prepaid card, and the game ball loaned from the ball lending machine It has been described that the return button 329 for returning cash and prepaid cards, and the ball lending return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, but it is limited thereto Instead, in this example, the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are integrated in the door frame right side unit 550. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 180 to 184.

FIG. 180 (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit 550 as viewed from the right side unit inner surface portion 550a side. FIG. 180 (B) is a front view of the right side unit inner surface portion 550 a of the door frame right side unit 550.
The protruding portion in the claims corresponds to the door frame right side unit 550, the inner side corresponds to the right side unit inner surface portion 550a, and the outer side corresponds to the right side unit outer surface portion 550b There is.

  By the way, during the game, the player sits on a chair and continues to operate the handle 302 with the right hand. On the other hand, the left hand is relatively free, and the operation of the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, the operation button 410, etc. is usually performed with the left hand. In addition, touch the gaming balls paid out as winning balls into the upper plate 321 with the left hand, or rectify the flow of gaming balls in the upper plate 321 with the fingers at any time, so that so-called balls do not occur. However, when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are arranged in the dish unit 320, when moving the left hand to the dish unit, the ball lending button 328 or the switch such as the return button 329 is accidentally touched, There is a problem that the lending of gaming balls and the return of prepaid cards may be performed at a timing unintended by a player. However, in the present embodiment, since the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are disposed on the door frame right side unit 550, the above problem can be reliably prevented. The details will be described below.

[First embodiment of the ball lending button, return button]
As shown in FIG. 180, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display unit 330. In this example, the right side unit in the right unit decoration base 562 After inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 at the lower part of the inner surface 550a, a predetermined number of gaming balls are pressed by pressing. If you press the ball lending button 328 to lend (pay out) into the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 and the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine, the amount of the loaned gaming ball is deducted There are a return button 329 for returning cash and prepaid cards, and a 3-digit 7-segment LED below the transparent surface. Remaining number of over-de, or, sphere rental return display unit 330 for displaying the error code and the like when the ball lending machine fails are arranged side by side.

  The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are under control of the main control board 1310 and the payout board, and when the ball lending button 328 or the return button 329 is operated, the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are main control board 1310 A signal is output to the CR unit installed beside the pachinko machine via the way, and payout of the game ball and return of the prepaid card are performed. For example, when the ball lending button 328 is operated, the signal output from the CR unit is output to the main control board 1310 and the payout board, and the game balls are paid out to the dish unit 320, and at the same time the ball lending return display unit 330 The numbers displayed on are subtracted.

  Further, a volume control button 336 and a brightness control button 337 are disposed above the ball rental return display unit 330 in the right unit decoration base 562. The volume control button 336 is composed of an upper button 336a and a lower button 336b. When the upper button 336a is operated, the volume of music and sound effects adapted to various effects can be increased, and conversely, the lower button 336b By operating, the volume of music and sound effects can be reduced according to various effects. The brightness adjustment button 337 includes an upper button 337a and a lower button 337b. When the upper button 337a is operated, the brightness of the image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to a predetermined level In the opposite direction, when the lower button 337b is operated, the brightness of the image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or the door frame side effect display device 460 is divided into predetermined stages and darkened. Can.

  The upper button 336a and the upper button 337a are formed in a triangular shape with one vertex pointing upward. The lower button 336 b and the lower button 337 b are formed in a triangular shape with one vertex pointing downward.

  In addition, above the volume control button 336 the letters "volume" and above the brightness control button 337 are given the letters "brightness", and furthermore, each button has what function In order to be recognized by the person with certainty, character printing such as "+" for the upper button 336a, "-" for the lower button 336b, "bright" for the upper button 337a, and "dark" for the lower button 337b It has been subjected. This makes it clear that which button should be operated at the time of volume control and brightness control, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

  Furthermore, in order to prevent accidental operation of the ball lending button 328 or the return button 329 when attempting to perform volume control or brightness control, the locations of the volume control button 336 and the brightness control button 337 are ball It arrange | positions in the location away from the arrangement location of lent button 328 and return button 329. FIG. Furthermore, the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 directly related to the game ball are arranged in proximity to each other, and the volume adjustment button 336 and the brightness adjustment button 337 close to each other so as not to affect the game ball such as volume and brightness. Because of the arrangement, it is possible to easily recognize the arrangement position of each button.

  Further, the volume control button 336 is capable of performing four steps of volume control of 0 to 3 and the brightness control button 337 is capable of controlling brightness of 3 steps of 1 to Volume increases as the numbers get larger. Also, when the display is "0", it is silent. The display of the luminance is displayed on the luminance adjustment display unit 339, and is displayed brighter as the number becomes larger.

  Further, since the volume adjustment display unit 338 is disposed between the upper button 336a and the lower button 336b, and the brightness adjustment display unit 339 is disposed between the upper button 337a and the lower button 337b, The adjustment display unit 338 corresponds to the volume adjustment button 336, and the brightness adjustment display unit 339 can recognize at a glance that it corresponds to the brightness adjustment button 337.

  The volume control button 336 and the brightness control button 337 are under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. When the volume control button 336 or the brightness control button 337 is operated, a signal is output to the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the volume and Brightness adjustment is performed. Next, a signal is output from the peripheral control unit 1511 to the volume adjustment display unit 338 and the brightness adjustment display unit 339, and the numbers displayed on the volume adjustment display unit 338 and the brightness adjustment display unit 339 change according to the adjustment result.

  Although illustration is omitted, characters are printed on the surface of the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 as an identification unit 328a and an identification unit 329a so that the player can reliably recognize these buttons. The identification unit 328 a has the characters “ball rental” printed on it, and the identification unit 329 a has the characters “return” printed thereon, and the type of button can be intuitively recognized. It is possible to prevent the decline in the game interest due to having to do it. In addition, the above-described identification unit 328a and identification unit 329a can be changed according to the concept of the gaming machine, for example, when the concept of the gaming machine is the Western concept, etc. The character "" may be "dispense", or the character "return" given to the identification unit 329a may be "return".

  The identification unit 328a and the identification unit 329a are not limited to the character printing, but for example, small liquid crystal is disposed inside the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, and displays "ball lending" and "return", or dots A character may be displayed using a matrix, or the character portion of the button may be formed of a transparent member, and the LED substrate may be arranged and displayed inside the button, and the player has each button Various specifications can be selected as long as the function can be recognized.

  Further, since the ball lending return display unit 330 is also arranged side by side with the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 at the lower part of the right unit decoration base 562, for example, when operating the ball lending button 328 In order to get in, it is possible to determine at a glance how many remaining numbers are left. In addition, the error code displayed when the ball rental machine is broken, for example, the start opening, the count switch, etc. are disconnected, the magnetic detection abnormality is detected, or the character displayed by the type of error For example, when the start port, the count switch, etc. are disconnected, "ER1" is displayed, and when the magnetic detection abnormality is detected, "ER2" is displayed.

  In addition, the error code displayed on the ball loan return display unit 330 is released from the error by operating an error release switch or a RAM clear switch, for example, which can be operated by a person in charge of the hall, and becomes a non-display state.

  In addition, a partial area in the decoration sheet may be used as an identification unit for the player to recognize the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329. As shown in FIG. 181, an area surrounded by a broken line in the right unit left decoration member 554 is defined as an identification area A, and an arrow is displayed above the lower end in the right unit left decoration member 554 and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329. The imitation pattern and the name of each button are drawn as an identification unit 328a and an identification unit 329a.

  Thus, by providing the identification portion as the pattern of the right unit left decoration member 554, the mere player can not only stay in the area for recognizing the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, but Since the function as a sheet on which a logo or the like in line with the concept of the presentation to be presented is sufficiently exhibited, the pattern design of the identification part can be made to a wide variety depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 Can be enhanced.

  In this example, for example, a pattern imitating a flower is drawn as a decoration of the decoration sheet, and the identification unit 328a causes the player to recognize the ball lending button 328 and the identification unit 329a causes the player to recognize the return button 329. Also, it is decorated to surround the letters "ball loan" and "return" with a pattern that imitates a flower. As a result, even when a part of the decorative sheet is used as the area as the identification part, the identification part floats up compared with the surrounding pattern, and it is possible to prevent giving a sense of discomfort. In addition, since the above-mentioned decoration sheet can be changed according to the concept of the gaming machine, for example, when the concept of the gaming machine is the concept of Western style, etc., the character "ball lending" is decorated as "PUSH" The decoration of the sheet can also be different.

  In addition, the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are not limited to the lower part of the right unit decoration base 562 in the right side unit inner surface portion 550a, and the right side is within the reach of the player while sitting in the game. You may arrange | position in the appropriate location in unit inner surface part 550a. In that case, it is more preferable to dispose the ball lending return display unit 330 at a position where the ball lending return display unit 330 can be viewed when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are viewed.

  In addition, the arrangement positions of the ball lending button 328, the return button 329 and the ball lending display portion 330 are not limited to the case of arranging in the door frame right side unit 550, but as shown in FIGS. It may be arranged in the side unit 530, and the operation on the ball lending button 328 may be facilitated while operating the handle 302 with the right hand. As a result, since the ball lending operation can be performed with the angle adjustment of the handle 302 fixed, the game can be continued while maintaining the hitting power of the gaming ball desired by the player, and the trouble of adjusting the handle 302 again It can be omitted.

  Further, when arranged in the door frame left side unit 530, the arrangement itself is the same as that in the case where the ball lend button 328 and the return button 329 are arranged in the door frame right side unit 550, so the detailed description is omitted. However, as shown in FIG. 182, for example, it is possible to arrange the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 on the left unit upper decoration base 534 on the left side unit inner surface 530a. Further, as shown in FIG. 183, a ball lending button 328 and a return button 329 are disposed on the left unit upper decoration base 534 on the left side unit outer surface 530b, and an identification portion 328a and an identification portion 329a visible from the player are displayed. It may be arranged on the left side unit inner side surface 530a. In such a case, when it is attempted to operate the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 with the right hand or the left hand, it is presumed that the upper part of the left unit decorative cover 536 is covered with the hand. By placing the 368 on the top of the left unit decoration cover 536 and detecting the player's hand, the operation for the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 is validated, and it is possible that another person other than the player mistakenly operates it. It is configured to prevent.

[The second embodiment of the ball lending button, return button]
The arrangement places of the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 may be arranged not only on the right side unit inner surface portion 550a but also on the right side unit outer surface portion 550b. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 184 (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit 550 as viewed from the right side unit outer surface portion 550b side. FIG. 184 (B) is a view showing the periphery of the identification part 328a and the identification part 329a of the right side unit inner surface part 550a in the present embodiment. FIG. 184 (C) is a diagram showing around the identification portions 336c and d and the identification portions 337c and d of the right side unit inner surface portion 550a in the present embodiment.

  The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 in the present example are vertically arranged at the lower part of the right side unit outer surface portion 550b in the right unit decorative base 562, as shown in FIG. 184 (A). When the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are disposed on the right side unit outer surface portion 550b, it is difficult for the player in the game to visually recognize the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, as shown in FIG. As shown in B), the identification portion 328a and the identification portion 329a described above are provided at the lower portion of the right side unit inner surface portion 550a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 184 (A), the volume control button 336 and the brightness control button 337 are vertically arranged at the center of the right side unit outer surface portion 550b of the right unit decorative base 562. In this case, it is difficult for the player in the game to visually check the volume control button 336 and the brightness control button 337. Therefore, as shown in FIG. Identification units 336 c and d and identification units 337 c and d for recognizing the arrangement positions of the adjustment button 336 and the brightness adjustment button 337 are provided.

  The arrangement locations of the identification unit 328a and the identification unit 329a in the present example are disposed at a location approximately overlapping the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 in the front view of the right side unit inner surface 550a in the right unit decoration base 562 . Since the characters "this back ball rental" are printed on the identification unit 328a and the characters "this back return" are printed on the identification unit 329a, the ball on the right side unit outer surface portion 550b side where the player in the game can not easily see Even when the rental button 328 and the return button 329 are arranged, it is possible to make the player recognize the arrangement positions of the respective buttons with certainty.

  Also in the identification units 336c and d and the identification units 337c and d, the right unit decoration base 562 is disposed at a position substantially overlapping the volume adjustment button 336 and the brightness adjustment button 337 in a front view of the right side unit inner surface 550a. . The characters "this back +" is printed on the identification unit 336c, the characters "this back light" is printed on the "this back-" identification unit 337c, and the characters "this back dark" is printed on the identification unit 337d. Therefore, even when the volume control button 336 and the brightness control button 337 are arranged on the side of the right side unit outer surface portion 550b where it is difficult for the player in the game to visually check, the positions where the respective buttons are arranged are surely played It is possible to make people aware.

  In this embodiment, since the volume control button 336 and the brightness control button 337 are provided on the right side unit outer surface portion 550b, the volume control display portion 338 is disposed between the identification portion 336c and the identification portion 336d. Since the brightness adjustment display unit 339 is disposed between the identification unit 337c and the identification unit 337d, it becomes difficult to view the volume adjustment display unit 338 and the brightness adjustment display unit 339 during the game. Absent.

  However, in this example, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, the volume control button 336, and the brightness control button 337 are disposed on the right side unit outer surface portion 550b side. As a result, there is a risk that disadvantages to the player such as payout of a game ball not desired by the player, return of a prepaid card, volume control, brightness control, etc. may occur, or the interest in the game may be lowered. In order to prevent these, in this example, it is configured to detect that the player has operated the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, the volume adjusting button 336 and the brightness adjusting button 337.

In this example, a distance measuring sensor 368 capable of detecting an object in front is provided at the lower part and center of the door frame right side unit 550, and in a state where the distance measuring sensor 368 is in the ON state (target detection), The operations for the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, the volume control button 336, and the brightness control button 337 are valid, and conversely, they are disabled in the OFF state (target non-detection).
Note that the distance measuring sensor of this example uses an optical distance measuring sensor that measures the distance using a light wave, and the direction of the light wave is output toward the player.

When the player tries to operate the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 arranged at the lower part of the right side unit outer surface 550b with the right hand or the left hand, the lower part of the right unit cover 563 is covered (hand covered It is guessed that). In addition, when trying to operate the volume control button 336 and the brightness control button 337 arranged at the center of the right side unit outer surface portion 550b with the right hand or the left hand, the hand is covered in the center of the right unit cover 563 (hand covered). It is guessed that.
That is, since the player's hand is placed in the front detection range of the distance measurement sensor 368, the distance measurement sensor 368 detects the player's hand and turns on the ball rental button 328 and the return button 329. And, the operations for the volume control button 336 and the brightness control button 337 become effective.

  Since the distance measuring sensor 368 disposed under the right unit cover 563 corresponds to the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are temporarily turned ON. Only the operation for is effective. Further, since the distance measuring sensor 368 disposed at the center of the right unit cover 563 corresponds to the volume control button 336 and the brightness control button 337, the volume control button 336 and the brightness control are temporarily turned ON. Only the operation for the button 337 is effective.

  When the distance measuring sensor 368 detects the player's hand, that is, when the sensor is in the ON state, the operation to the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, the volume adjusting button 336 and the brightness adjusting button 337 becomes effective. Therefore, for example, a ball customer other than a player, for example, a ball customer playing a game on the right, sees in the left direction of the ball rental button 328, return button 329, volume control button 336 and brightness control button 337, Even if they misunderstand that they are the buttons corresponding to the game machine in which they are playing a game and operate them by mistake, their hands unless they are intentionally moved in front of the distance measurement sensor 368. Does not fall within the detection range of the distance measurement sensor 368. As a result, it is possible to suppress payout of the game ball at a time when the player does not desire, return of the prepaid card, volume control, and brightness control.

  In addition to the distance measuring sensor 368, various methods may be appropriately selected as long as the player detects that the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, the volume adjusting button 336, and the brightness adjusting button are operated by the player's own operation. Make it selectable. For example, the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are disposed only when the touch sensor is disposed on the right side unit inner surface 550a instead of the distance measuring sensor and it is determined that the player's hand is touching by the touch sensor. The operation for the volume control button 336 and the brightness control button may be enabled.

  Also, even if the sensors are not described above, for example, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, a volume control button 336 and a brightness control button are disposed on both the right side unit inner surface 550a and the right side unit outer surface 550b. By operating both buttons of the same type, it may be enabled. In this case, the ball lending buttons 328, return buttons 329, volume control buttons 336 and luminance control buttons are disposed at substantially overlapping locations in front view of the right side unit inner surface 550a due to the operation. desirable.

[Second embodiment of the sphere loan return display unit]
As shown in FIG. 185, the right unit left decorative member 554 is disposed as well as the one disposed side by side with the sphere lending button 328 and the return button 329 as the placement location of the above-mentioned sphere lending return display unit 330. You may make it install in the accommodating recessed part 553d. Specifically, the ball rental return display unit 330 is disposed between the housing recess 553 d and the right unit left decoration member 554, and the ball rental return display on the right unit left decoration member 554 in front view of the right side unit inner surface portion 550a. The portion substantially overlapping with the portion 330 is hollowed out. Furthermore, since a pattern is drawn around the hollowed out portion, as shown in FIG. 186, when the right unit left decoration member 554 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d, the pattern encloses the ball rental return display portion 330. It looks like a decoration. Thereby, the decorativeness to the ball rental return display unit 330 is enhanced compared to the conventional case, and by exchanging the right unit left decoration member 554, the design around the ball rental return display unit 330 can be diversified. can do.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, a plurality of ball loan return display units 330 may be provided corresponding to each of the ball loan button 328 and the return button 329.
The ball rental display unit 330 a corresponds to the ball rental button 328, and the return display unit 330 b corresponds to the return button 329. Further, the error display unit 330c displays an error code or the like when the ball rental machine breaks down. The ball lending display unit 330a constantly displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, and recognizes whether or not the player can lend a ball. The return display section 330b displays "remaining" if the remaining number of cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine is left, and "remaining" if not remaining, and "remained" By operating the return button 329, "Return" is displayed, and the prepaid card is returned to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 187, the ball lending display unit 330a and the return display unit 330b may be installed in the housing recess 553d in which the right unit left decoration member 554 is arranged. Specifically, the ball rental display portion 330a and the return display portion 330b are disposed between the accommodation recess 553d and the right unit left decoration member 554, and the right unit left in the front view of the right side unit inner surface portion 550a. A portion of the decorative member 554 substantially overlapping with the ball lending display portion 330 a and the return display portion 330 b is hollowed out. Then, as shown in FIG. 187, when the right unit left decoration member 554 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d, the ball lending display unit 330a and the return display unit 330b can be viewed through the hollowed out portion.

  By providing a plurality of ball loan return display unit 330 according to the function of ball rental and return, the presence or absence of the remaining number is intuitively compared to the one simply displaying the remaining number of cash or prepaid card as a number. Can be recognized. Furthermore, since the ball lending display unit 330a is disposed in the vicinity of the corresponding sphere lending button 328, and similarly, the return display unit 330b is disposed in the vicinity of the corresponding return button 329, It is easy to recognize which button corresponds to which display unit.

  In the above, an example in which various buttons and display portions are integrated on the door frame right side unit 550 and the door frame left side unit 530 has been described, but regardless of these, for example, the operation button 410 is the door frame right side unit 550 or door It may be arranged in the frame left side unit 530.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. Fig. 87 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a door frame top unit seen from the back It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear. 90 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 87 taken along the line PP. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the central base 571 at the center of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, which is attached to the center of the through hole 111 above the through hole 111 A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached respectively to the fronts of the pair of side bases 572 A pair of openings 574a penetrating in the front and back at a front position of a pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape having an open rear, and from a position closer to the center in the lateral direction than the pair of openings 574a A plurality of (three on the left and three on the left and three on the left and right sides) which extend in the longitudinal direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction and are separated vertically. A unit body 574 having a pair 574b and attached to the front of the center base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and a pair of upper speakers 573 are disposed on the front side and close the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal mounted on the rear side of the unit body 574.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 at the center in the lateral direction of the unit main body 574 and is attached to the top middle decorative member 576 having translucency and the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front of the unit main body 574 and both left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three each in the left and right directions) extending from near the opening 574a to near the left and right ends of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576 in the front of the unit body 574 Top left decorative lens member 579 attached to the left and right sides respectively and covering the front surface of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 The top right decorative lens member 580 and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front side and the opening 574a from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 The top middle left decoration member 581 and the top middle right decoration member 582 extend to near the center side end portion of

  Furthermore, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right sides of the unit body 574, and the LEDs are mounted on the plurality of (three) light guide members 578 at locations facing the lateral outer end. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the unit main body 574 in the left and right direction A door frame top mounted with a pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective portions and a front surface of the pair of substrate bases 585 with a plurality of LEDs mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit body 574 Middle left decoration board 586 and door frame top middle right decoration board 587, door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and door frame top middle right A pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 at the front side of the substrate 587, and a.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 attached to the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit body 574 and the door frame top unit relay substrate 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 574, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 574 And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

  The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of asperities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are respectively attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front of each side base 572 respectively. When assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely such that the front sides of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward in the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-shaped speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 574 is formed in a shape as viewed from the front, such that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the square extending in the left and right direction bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in a front view such that it has a rectangular shape extending left and right, which is cut away in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 574 has a square shape extending in the left and right direction, and a half of the entire width (length in the left-right direction) around the center in the left-right direction on the front end side It is formed in the shape which combined the trapezoid which protruded to the front, and the quadrangle which protruded the front briefly by setting the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side. Therefore, in the unit body 574, a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit body 574 with the left and right ends of the front end of the portion projecting forward on both sides of the portion projecting forward in the left and right direction center in the front surface It is located more backward (is recessed).

  In the unit main body 574, openings 574a penetrating in the front and back direction are respectively formed in a portion from the left and right direction both ends in the front surface to a position outside the portion projecting forward. The unit body 574 is a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a diagonally extending portion of the front side projecting in a trapezoidal shape in the front. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574 b extend laterally from near the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the front surface of the unit body 574 to near the opening 574 a. In addition, the plurality of slits 574 b are formed on the both sides at the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 so as to be separated vertically three by three respectively.

  Further, the unit body 574 has an upper opening 574c which is notched toward the front from the rear end in the lateral center on the upper surface and a lower opening 574d which is notched forward from the rear end in the horizontal direction on the lower surface. And. The upper opening 574 c of the unit body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574 d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  The unit body 574 also includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at the left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decoration 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 574 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that protrudes forward in the lateral center. The top middle decoration member 576 extends outward in the left and right direction from the upper end of the left and right sides of the metapentagon in which the shape of the front view is bent so that the left and right direction central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward. It is formed in the shape which combined the substantially right triangle which connected the front-end | tip of the edge and the lower end of the right and left sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decoration member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

  In the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, after the top middle decoration member 576, the front surface is inclined to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the irregular pentagonal portion of the top middle decoration member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making the LEDs emit light, it is possible to make the top middle decoration member 576 emit light and decorate.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of both the left and right sides of the front end of the front projecting portion of the front surface of the unit body 574. When the side close to both ends in the lateral direction of the unit body 574 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center is described as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight from the end side toward the center side A straight portion 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in the form of a large radius arc so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a to the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction of the arc portion 578b is formed to be smaller toward the center. In the light guide member 578 assembled in the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately in front of the opening 574a of the unit body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 574 from the front. There is.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c having saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and a diffusion input portion 578d having a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. Is equipped.

  In the light guide member 578 assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the end portions on both outer sides in the left-right direction face the LED frame 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the LEDs 586a and 587a of the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident from the end portions in the left and right direction on the light guide member 578, the light is a straight portion 578a The light travels from the end to the front side sequentially by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. The top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of these members is illuminated and decorated.

  In the light guide member 578, light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is incident from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thus, the portion located in front of the circular arc portion 578 b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 and the door frame top middle decoration substrate 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to emit and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 disposed in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a each accommodating the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 579a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574 e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 disposed on the right side of the front of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a each accommodating three light guiding members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each of the decorative lens portions 580a, the concavities and convexities of the quadrangular pyramid projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is lighted and decorated by the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the LEDs 584 a and 587 a of the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top via the three light guiding members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a in the front of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front of the unit body 574 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the right opening 574a in the front of the unit body 574 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is the top right It projects further forward than the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 574 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 is formed by the LED 583 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The door frame top right decoration substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decoration portion 574f) in the unit body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end face of the three light guide members 578 mounted on the front on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the lateral direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can emit light independently of one another. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit body 574 through the straight portions 578a of the three light guiding members 578 by the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 It can be decorated to emit light.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 574 in which the plurality of slits 574 b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically. The substrate base 585 has a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending up and down and back and forth, a rear wall of a front view rectangular shape extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall The upper wall of a substantially right triangle with the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse and the lower side of the side wall with the lower wall The lower wall of the right triangle is formed in the shape of a triangular prism box in which the upper and lower oblique sides are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit body 574 such that the portion that is open is closed by the unit body 574. In the substrate base 585, the left decoration substrate 586 in the door frame top or the right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached such that the opened portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center in the unit body 574 Be The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the laterally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thus, in the state where the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit body 574 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 586 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 574 on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586. Thereby, in the state where the left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side from the center of the unit body 574. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 causes the plurality of LEDs 586 a to emit light, thereby allowing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578 b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The right decoration substrate 587 in the door frame top is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close the box-like open part from the front in the substrate base 585 attached on the rear side on the right of the right and left center in the unit body 574 Be The right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 in the door frame top, so that the front surface moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 with respect to the horizontally extending surface It will be in the inclined state. Thereby, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is a surface of a portion where three slits 574b right of the center of the unit body 574 in the left and right direction are formed. Approximately parallel to the

  A plurality of LEDs 586 a are mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 574 of the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587. Thereby, in the state where the right decorative substrate 587 in the door frame top is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side from the center of the unit body 574. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes the plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, and thereby causes a portion near the middle middle decoration member 576 of the top right decoration lens member 580 to emit light and decorate via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 is attached to the front rear side of the unit body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle decoration member 587 and the unit body 574. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially in left-right symmetry by non-light transmitting members. A light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of a plurality of LEDs 586 a and 587 a of a left decorative substrate 586 in the door frame top and a plurality of right decorative substrates 587 in the door frame top arranged in a row corresponding to three slits 574 I am divided. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guiding member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guiding member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration Luminescent decoration can be performed in a state where the respective decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is attached to the front of the center base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, a door frame top left decoration substrate 583, a door frame top right decoration substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and a door The connection between the frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 and the door main body relay substrate of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is connected to the door main body relay substrate via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay substrate 589 is covered by a relay substrate cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved such that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 turn to the rear. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes largely forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 disposed at the center, It is formed to extend from the both sides to the top left decoration portion 574e and the top right decoration portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit body 574. Thereby, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, a front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal at the rear of each of both left and right direction both ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are disposed. The speaker cover 575 is provided so as to face forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a spaced apart above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be made to be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is a door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580 The light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580, and the top left decoration lens member The entire front surface of the lens 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can emit and decorate the entire front surface of the upper portion of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Operation effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than in the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is made smaller. Thereby, the front of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be made as wide as possible visible to the player (forward) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the large game board 5 of the game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 includes a rendering operation unit 400 having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through hole 111. A shape in which the front of the lower half (portion below the upper plate 321) on both left and right sides is recessed so as to turn backwards (the front ends of the left and right ends of the plate unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400 The front surface of the right and left sides of the rendering operation unit 400 is formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be positioned rearward than the straight line connecting the two. As a result, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the front in the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to be largely protruded forward, so that the rendering operation unit 400 is highlighted and emphasized for the player. It can be made to pay attention to the rendering operation unit 400 strongly.

  In the door frame 3, the rendering operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 is inclined so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Because the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 because it is attached in the state, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player loses his sight and effects operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly viewed, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be enhanced. In addition, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image is sufficiently facilitated. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 has the operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the entire height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, the short distance of the player's hand when operating the operation button 410 The user can touch any part of the operation button 410 by moving the button, and "early pressing" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, it can not only be pressed from the top like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also it can be operated left or right The operation can be performed well even from the front, and the operation using the operation button 410 can be more enjoyable by the operation button 410 having a good operability.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is attached to the effect operation unit 400 by the plate unit 320 in a suspended state, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. According to the state, when the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibration, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, and the player is surprised by the operation button The presentation using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) across the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the front center of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 below is not noticeable, it can be made easy to make the player who is familiar with the conventional pachinko machine clearly recognize that it is clearly different, and the player's attention is strongly attracted It can be a high power pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 forms the lower plate 322 so as to wrap around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening portion 326 d opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 in the front surface of the plate unit 320 Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased relative to the size of the lower plate opening portion 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear of the lower plate 322 turns to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts the left hand in the lower plate 322 or places the left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel discomfort, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the game and to reduce the size of the lower plate opening 326d. It can also be recognized that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than the height by touch.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the gaming balls of the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray 322 from the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322 into the lower portion of the tray unit 320 or the like. The countersink holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front and rear direction, and are arranged on the right outside (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400) of the lower plate opening 326d in front view. That is, the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball extraction hole 322a, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening portion 326d) in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326, the front end of the lower plate cover 340 Since the player is disposed behind the side, etc., the player can not see the lower ball supply port 323c and the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, the lower frame ball withdrawal hole 322a is disposed on the lower side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c (the front) in the lower plate 322. When the lower disc ball removal hole 322a is opened, the gaming ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower disc ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like when it enters the lower plate 322. It will be done. At this time, since the lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball removal hole 322a can not be seen from the player side, the flow of gaming balls discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box is also I can not see it. In this way, it is possible to give the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the payout device 830 in a state that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the upper plate 321 are full for the player are directly discharged to the dollar box. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the troublesomeness of passing through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (such as the operation to hit the game ball and the effect image) and to suppress the decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, in the lower frame 322, the door frame 3 has the lower flat ball opening hole 322a at the front left position of the lower flat ball supply opening 323c, and the lower plate 322 stands upright on the right side of the lower flat ball opening 322a. Since the upper wall portion is bent obliquely so as to face the ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower ball delivery opening 323c to the lower plate 322 are directly removed from the lower bowl. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be reflected to the right side wall to be guided indirectly to the lower circular sphere opening 322a. Thus, in the state where the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball supplied from the lower ball ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is a region on the lower plate 322 on the left side of the lower ball ball extraction hole 322a. Since it is possible to discharge downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower plate ball ball, the gaming ball flowing in the lower plate 322 is directed to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without showing the player. Can be discharged, and the same effects as described above can be exhibited.

  In addition, the door frame 3 includes the lower plate opening portion 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward, between the effect operation unit attaching portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be output forward well, and the sound by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player places a hand on the lower plate 322 or moves close to it, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 which is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. Can entertain people and control the decline in interest.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and protrudes forward largely from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an operation effect such as partitioning with the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 can play a game in a private room It is possible to give an illusion of a feeling of being present, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation to other players around.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 can emit light and decorate the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-shaped and largely protrudes forward, the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 lined up Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 1 can be informed of the presence of the pachinko machine even from a distance from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to players. It can be machine 1.

  In the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 A shape recessed so as to be turned backwards (A top middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 The front surfaces of the left and right sides of the 576 are formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be positioned rearward. As a result, only the decorative member 576 at the top of the door frame top unit 570 appears to be projected forward largely, so that the decorative member 576 can be made to be highlighted and highlighted to the player, The inner decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right direction ends are provided with the speaker 573, The entire front face of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. As a result, since the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper portion of the door frame 3, and a decoration distinctly different from conventional pachinko machines is provided It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player, and to entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of this embodiment, the rendering operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. Because each of the left and right direction is largely projected forward, it is possible to show the player a decoration having a sense of unity in the upper and lower sides where the virtual line passing through the left and right direction center is noticeable, and by the refined decoration. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

  In addition, since the door frame 3 causes the top middle decorative member 576 and the rendering operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction to project forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the light emitting decoration of the effect operation unit 400 is performed, the light emission line extending vertically at the center in the left and right direction of the front face of the door frame 3 can be shown to the player, and the player's gaze is arranged at the center in the left and right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape whose front is open, and the game board 5 is removably accommodated therein. The main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall so as to be openable and closable at the upper and lower ends of the front left side and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. It is attached openably and closably.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-like main body frame base 600 which is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and is capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and of the main body frame base 600. It is attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame upper hinge member 140 and door frame The lower side hinge member 150 comprises a body frame upper hinge member 620 and a body frame lower hinge member 640 rotatably mounted, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side of the body frame base 600 in a front view. .

  In addition, the main unit frame 4 is attached to the lower front of the main unit frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 is attached, which locks between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and left side of the body frame base 600. A reverse L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out gaming balls to the player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And a back cover 980 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape in which the shape in front view extends vertically. The body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the height from a position slightly lower than the upper end, and the game board insertion slot 601 in which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side The lower side of the board insertion slot 601 is formed, and the game board placement unit 602 on which the game board 5 is placed and the upper side of the game board placement unit 602 project upward from the left and right direction And a game board control unit 603 for restricting the backward movement.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 is a launch device attachment portion 604 for attaching the ball launch device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board placement portion 602 in front view, and a front view right side of the launch device attachment portion 604 The cylinder insertion port 605 which penetrates back and forth and into which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth from the left and right center from the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 A circular opening which penetrates the front and rear of the game board mounting portion 602 in the front opening left side of the game board mounting portion 602 and which has the speaker unit 920 of the board unit 900 facing forward. And a speaker opening 607.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side in a front view of the game board slot 601, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is pivotable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided for attachment. The body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions of the left end in a front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment portion 609 and the lower hinge for attaching the body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640. A mounting portion 610 is provided.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 is rotatably attached at a position slightly lower on the left side than the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in an opening cover 615 closing the opening for connection 606 openably and closably. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the body frame 4.

  An upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent in an L shape downward, and a cylindrical shape projecting upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621 A body frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an upper hinge main body 621 in front view left side of the body frame hinge pin 622 penetrate the door frame side upper hinge member 140 And an upper hinge hole 623 for a door frame. In the main frame side upper hinge member 620, a portion of the upper hinge main body 621 that is bent downward is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the main body frame 4.

  The lower hinge member 640 on the body frame side vertically penetrates at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the plate material extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And an outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed on the upper side of the lower hinge first main body 641 The rear part of the plate material is bent upward in an L shape and penetrates up and down at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 and the lower hinge second main body 643 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 The door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting and extending upward from the left end on the rear side of the door frame hinge hole 644 at the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. And a restricting piece 645 for restricting the rotation range.

  The lower hinge second body 643 has a horizontally extending portion spaced upward from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 641 and a portion bent upward is a first lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of a portion of the main body 641 that is bent upward. The main frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the main frame 4 by bending the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The cross section of the reinforcing frame 660 in plan view is formed in a U shape whose right side is open, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In addition, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts movement of the game board 5 inserted in the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 to the front and up and down to the rear side of the part extending rightward from the front end. The left positioning member 661 is mounted in a pair at vertically spaced positions.

  The hinge side (left side in front view) of the main frame base 600 can be reinforced by the reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main frame 4 (game board 5) from the left passing between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 It is possible to prevent incorrect insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball firing device 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main unit frame 4. In this ball launcher 680, the hitting strength of the gaming ball changes in accordance with the pivot angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the front lower right corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and to the rear surface of the right side of the launch base 681 in a front view. A firing solenoid 682 formed of a rotary solenoid extending forward and penetrating, a hitting ball 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682 and a tip end extending diagonally upward from the tip of the hitting ball 683 And a launch rail 684 mounted on the front of the launch base 681 so that the game balls can roll.

  In this ball launcher 680, gaming balls are supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the gaming balls are supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684 Then, when the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hit ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting ball 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and driven into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the impact strength of the game ball, etc., between the firing rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) Then, it falls to the ball receptacle 275 of the lower far cover unit 270 and is discharged into the lower tray 322 through the inside of the far cover unit 270.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lockable units with the door frame 3 that project forward from the unit base 701. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of locking with the outer frame 2, and projecting cylindrically forward from a lower portion of the unit base 701, A protrusion protrudes from the front end in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted, and the door is rotated according to the rotation direction of the key. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking the locking of either the frame wedge 702 or the outer frame wedge 703.

[4-6. Disbursement unit]
The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95 to FIG. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Furthermore, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ in FIG. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is closed by the ball drawing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball drawing passage is opened It is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a front perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 106 (b) is a rear perspective view of the upper full ball passage unit. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a front perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit in the dispensing unit, and FIG. 108 (b) is a rear perspective view of the lower full ball passage unit. Further, FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank passage unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full cylinder passage unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank route unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state . FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the door cover full cover unit and the lower full ball unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, etc., the dispensing unit 800 of this embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the top of the dispensing unit base 801. Ball tank 802 for storing gaming balls supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape extending upward and downward and attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 A tank rail 803 extends to the left and right for guiding the gaming ball in the ball tank 802 in a left direction in a front view. Within the tank rail 803, the game balls are aligned in the front and rear two rows by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) swingably suspended from above while guiding the game balls to the left.

  In addition, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the top left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guides the gaming balls from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner; A payout device 830 which dispenses the gaming balls removably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball induction unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control substrate 951 accommodated in the payout control substrate box 950. And have. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, gaming balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the gaming balls are dispensed one by one.

  Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the gaming balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and according to the storage state of the gaming balls on the upper tray 321 in the tray unit 320 The upper full ball passage unit 850 for releasing the water from either the normal discharge hole 850 d or the full discharge hole 850 e, and the normal discharge hole 850 d of the upper full ball passage unit 850 attached to the lower end of the discharge unit base 801 The guide ball 861 guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. The game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e is guided forward from the front end of the door frame 3. The main frame of the full opening guide channel 862 leading to the full tank receiving hole 274, and the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861 and the full guidance channel 862 And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The ball guiding unit 820 extends vertically and has a box-like front case 821 open at the rear side, a box-like rear case 822 attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and the front side open, and the front case A flat plate-like partition plate 823 attached between the 821 and the rear case 822 and separating the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and the front and rear ends through the partition plate 823 to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 A rod-like shaft member 824 attached, and a pair of movable piece members 825 and 826 rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and disposed in the front case and the rear case, respectively And a ball breakage detection sensor 827 mounted in the front case 821 and capable of detecting the rotational position of the pair of movable piece front 825 and movable piece rear 826.

  The front case 821 has a ball guiding inlet 821a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. 821 b, and a guiding passage 821 c which communicates the ball guiding inlet 821 a with the ball guiding outlet 821 b and through which the game balls can flow. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d The detection unit 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering unit 821f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 821e to the left and right of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side in a front view of the detection portion 821e in the guiding passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guiding inlet 822a at the upper right side where game balls are open for passage, and a ball induction outlet where game balls are open at a position closer to the right than the center of the bottom in the left-right direction. A guide passage 822c is provided, which communicates the ball guiding inlet 822a with the ball guiding outlet 822b and through which the game balls can flow. The guiding passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d obliquely extending at a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the ball induction inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end, and the center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d The detection unit 822e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e to the left and right width of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection portion 822e in the guiding passage 822c in a front view.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821. The guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front and rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. There is.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the induction passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 is a flat movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a into which the shaft member 824 is inserted An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle with respect to the right surface of the movable piece 825a; an extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a; and fanning around the shaft hole 825b A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and which penetrates back and forth, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f extending outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and detectable by the broken ball detection sensor 827 and extending outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 passes through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece front 825 rotates so that the weight attachment portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned directly below the shaft hole 825b by its own weight. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted through the notch 821g of the front case 821, and the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 821c. In addition, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f of the movable piece front 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when the gaming ball is in the guiding passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member back 826 is a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically and a shaft hole 826b which is penetrated back and forth at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a Extending from the upper end of the movable piece 826a to the right surface of the movable piece 826a at right angles with the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a, and fan-shapedly extending around the shaft hole 826b A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole which protrudes outward from around the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and which penetrates back and forth A detection piece 826f which extends outward in a flat plate shape from the right end and can be detected by the broken ball detection sensor 827, and extends outward in a flat plate shape from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attachment portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is pivoted so as to be positioned directly below the shaft hole 826b The movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Accordingly, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822 and the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the induction | guidance | derivation passage 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts on the outer wall of the guiding passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotation in the direction (left direction in front view) projecting into the guiding passage 822c. In addition, when the movable piece member 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction (right direction in front view) approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. I agree with the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the induction passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  In the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, a plurality of gaming balls are supplied in a row in the back and forth direction by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are provided in a state in which the plurality of gaming balls are aligned. 822 can lead to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by the partition plate 823, the gaming balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c, 822c do not interfere with each other, and are well distributed. Can.

  In addition, when the game ball circulates in the induction passages 821c and 822c of the ball induction unit 820, the game ball abuts on the movable piece 825a and 826a of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece 826 after the movable piece 825a and 826a The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 rotate in a direction coincident with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821 c and 822 c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that gaming balls are present in the guide paths 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820 pays out the game balls, the game balls in the guide paths 821c and 822c flow downstream. When the game ball flows in the induction passage 821c, 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing in the introduction portion 821d, 822d is the movable piece at the upper portion of the detection portion 821e, 822e It will rebound to the 825a, 826a side, and will abut on the movable piece 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, they are pinched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide paths 821c and 822c by the vibration. Dust and dirt can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be favorably rotated by their own weight and the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guiding passages 821c and 822c by means of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 respectively, and the movable piece front 825 and Since each detection piece 825f, 826f of the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game ball in any of the guide paths 821c, 822c disappears, the movable piece member front is removed. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the back 825 or movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guiding passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 Ru. Therefore, the game balls can be detected early, so that the game balls can be quickly replenished, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, the player's interest can be reduced. It can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the weight of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 and the weight can be obtained by screwing in and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826. As a result, the lower end sides of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily turned in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the induction passage 821c, 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the induction passage 821c, 822c, so dust in the induction passage 821c, 822c No dust or the like adheres to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Thus, the rotation of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be suppressed.

  As described above, in the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, the movable piece 825a, 826a at the lower end side of the movable piece 825a, 826a after the movable piece 825 and 826 after the lower end side protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, 822c By attaching weights made of metal screws to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface in contact with the game ball, the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 by their own weight and weight of the weight The lower end sides of 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. In addition, the upper end of the movable piece 825a, 826a is rotatably attached outside the guiding passage 822c, and the lower end side protrudes in the guiding passage 821c, 822c, so dust or dirt in the guiding passage 821c, 822c Etc. do not adhere to the upper end or the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a turn to the wall side of the guide passage 821c, 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall, so their own weight etc. Accordingly, the movable pieces 825a and 826 (the movable piece members 825 and 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  In addition, in order to screw and attach a metal screw as a weight to weight attachment portions 825e and 826e as through holes, the weight is fixed even if the front of movable piece 825 and the rear of movable piece 826 rotate frequently. The movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without coming off from the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 (weight attachment parts 825 e, 826 e) . In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825 e and 826 e, the process of attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost of assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the guiding path 821c, 822c is provided with the introduction portion 822d for guiding the gaming ball toward the movable piece 825a, 825c on the upstream side of the portion where the movable piece 825a, 825c protrudes inside. Since the game balls contact the movable pieces 825a and 826a by the game balls flowing in the passages 821c and 822c, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, dust, dirt, etc. which are pinched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the walls of the induction passages 821c, 822c can be removed by the vibration of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and the movable pieces are movable The front member 825 and the rear movable member 826 can be rotated well.

  Therefore, since the movable piece front 825 and the movable piece back 826 can be favorably rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the gaming ball in the guiding path 821c, 822c can be detected reliably, and It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect due to a false detection or the like. In addition, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the inside of the guide passage 821c, 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passage 821c, 822c can be reliably detected through the movable pieces 825a, 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the game ball, and by reducing the time for interrupting the game as much as possible, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

[4-6 b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 830 of the dispensing unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape whose rear side is open, and the payout opening 831a where the gaming ball is open at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and the gaming ball is open near the left end in front view Payout outlet 831b, ball outlet outlet 831c where gaming balls are open for passage near the right end of the front view in the bottom surface, payout opening 831a and payout outlet 831b are communicated and the payout passage 831d through which gaming balls can flow , And a dispensing passage 831 d branched from the middle and communicated with the ball outlet 831 c and has a ball out passage 831 e through which gaming balls can flow, and is attached to the back side of the front box 831 The game ball is open near the left end of the top view in the bottom view in the bottom of the payout opening 832a where the game ball is open so that the game ball can pass in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface. A payout opening 832b which is overly open, a ball outlet 832c which allows gaming balls to pass in the vicinity of the right end in the front view on the bottom, a payout opening 832a and a payout outlet 832b are communicated, and the gaming balls are distributed It has a possible payout passage 832d and a rear box 832 branched from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicating with the ball removal outlet 832c and having a ball removal passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 open on the rear side, and is mounted in the front box 831 and the rotation shaft passes through the front box 831 The delivery motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 834, and the drive gear 835 are meshed and can be rotated by the front box 831 and the front cover 833 The intermediate gear 836 in the form of a spur gear attached to the gear, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and a driven gear 837 rotatably penetrated, the front end being attached to the front cover 833 and the rear The shaft member 838, the end of which passes through the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838, and the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are dispelled. A blade rotation detection sensor 840 disposed in the passages 831 d and 832 d and disposed between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detecting a rotation of the discharge blade 839. And have.

  Furthermore, the dispensing device 830 is a flat-plate-like partition plate 841 attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to separate the dispensing passage 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832 d of the rear box 832; And a rear box 832, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting a gaming ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b by the rotation of the payout blade 839, the payout passage 831d and 832d, and the ball release passage 831e, 832e is a portion where it is bifurcated and is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and it is possible to close the ball removal passage 831e, 832e, the ball extraction movable piece 843, the front box 831 and the rear And a ball pulling lever 844 slidably mounted up and down on the upper right side surface of the box 832 so as to make the ball pulling movable piece 843 pivotable or non-rotatable It is equipped with a.

  The dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 obliquely extends from the dispensing inlet 831a toward the ball removing outlet 831c to the lower right of the front view, and descends at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface to the entire height of the front box 831 To extend vertically to the left, and bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the front box 831 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 831b so as to be positioned just above the discharge outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the front box 831. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 831d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831 e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge inlet 831 a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831 d, and has a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface of the front view right side with a guide shelf 831 f projecting backward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the discharge outlet 831 b in the discharge passage 831 d. And a lever attaching portion 831g for slidably attaching the ball removing lever 844 up and down.

  The discharge passage 832d of the rear box 832 obliquely extends from the discharge port 832a toward the ball removal outlet 832c to the lower right in front view, and is lower at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832 And bend to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the height, then extend vertically downward again approximately 1/3 from the left end of the width of the rear box 832 It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the discharge outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the discharge outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the entire height of the rear box 832. The delivery blade 839 is disposed at a cranked portion in the delivery passage 832d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 832e is a form further extending a portion obliquely extending from the discharge port 832a to the lower right in the discharge passage 832d, and is about 1/3 the height of the rear box 832 from the top It branches between the heights near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface in a front view and a guiding shelf 832f projecting forward as it goes downward at a portion extending vertically toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d. And a lever mounting portion 832g for slidably mounting the ball release lever 844 in the vertical direction.

  The delivery passages 831 d and 832 d and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831 d and 832 d are partitioned by the partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is disposed. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide racks 831 f and 832 f and the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b. That is, the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the gaming balls distributed in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 are front and rear of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a in the circumferential direction at an angle of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the spur gear shape that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connection portion 837c which protrudes cylindrically from the center of the gear portion 837a and has projections and depressions formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge blade 839 .

  The delivery blade 839 extends in a cylindrical shape from the front to the back, and projects in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals from the front end of the base cylinder 839a into which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the front end of the base cylinder 839a. (A plurality of (three) front blades 839b, and a plurality of (three) projecting from the rear end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the base cylindrical portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to alternate with the front blades 839b The third part of the rear blade 839c, and a connected part projecting cylindrically forward from the front end of the base cylindrical part 839a and having projections and depressions that can be connected with the connection part 387c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end And 839 d.

  The front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the discharge blade 839 are respectively provided three by three at an angular interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c is circumferentially opposed to the front blade 839b so as to be staggered. It is extended outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, three front blades 839 b (rear blades 839 c) are connected by a circular arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the gaming ball. As a result, between the front wings 839b (rear wings 839c), a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumference of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c with respect to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylindrical portion 839a in the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. 0 of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. It is supposed to be four times.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the gaming ball may be held by the portion (ball housing portion 839e) of the arc between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the gaming ball can be accommodated. As a result, the gaming balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be quickly stored in the space (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

  In the delivery blade 839 of this embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the delivery passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the delivery passage 832d of the rear box 832 in the assembled state of the delivery device 830. The game balls in the payout paths 831 d and 832 d can be paid out respectively. Further, the delivery blade 839 is disposed at a location where the delivery passage 831d, 832d is bent in a crank shape below the center of the entire height of the front case 821 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the dispensing passages 831 d and 832 d, the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839 is located directly below the portion vertically extending downward from near the center of the entire height of the front case 821 and the rear box 832. In the crank-shaped portion of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839 and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball (see FIG. 95). In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the portion formed in the arc shape of the payout paths 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball. .

  Thus, the payout device 830 can pass through the crank-folded portions of the payout passages 831 d and 832 d when the gaming balls having flowed down onto the payout blades 839 abut the outer periphery of the front blades 839 b and 839 c. In addition, it is not discharged downward from the delivery outlets 831 b and 832 b. On the other hand, when the gaming ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves along with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the cranked portion of the payout passage 831d, 832d, and from the payout outlet 831b, 832b It is discharged downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front wing 839b and the rear wing 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the outer diameter of the gaming ball is 1 by the ball accommodating portion 839e. Since the depth of 1⁄7 to 1⁄4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time taken to accommodate the gaming balls while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout wing 839 is rotated fast, the gaming ball can be housed in the ball housing portion 839e and sent to the payout outlet 831b, 832b side. Therefore, the number of game balls paid out per unit time can be increased more than in the past, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the top and bottom and front and back, and the lower portion is bent to extend in a tubular shape in the front and back at the upper end of the main portion 843a formed in a V shape. A shaft cylindrical portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from an upper portion of an outer side of the main portion 843a bent in a V shape, and a protruding portion 843c. And a weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 105) formed of a through hole penetrating in the front and back direction in a lower part bent in a V-shape.

  In the assembled state of the dispensing device 830, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body 843a extends obliquely to the lower left in front view, In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position obliquely extending from the delivery port 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view slightly above Is attached to

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 according to the present embodiment slides the ball release lever 844 downward, and the lower portion of the ball release lever 844 is in contact with the protrusion 843 c of the ball release movable piece 843 from the right in front view. I am in touch. Thereby, the pivoting movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 105A).

  In this normal state, in the main portion 843a of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 bent in the V-shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is a front left lower left It extends to The lower end of the main body 843a is located in the vicinity of a portion where the dispensing passages 831d and 832d and the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, while the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (the main body portion 843a), the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left forms a part of the walls of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The unrolling movable piece 843 of this embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the unpunching movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the axial cylinder portion 843b in a normal state. Thus, a force is exerted to try to rotate counterclockwise in a front view, but since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball release lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball extracting lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball extracting lever 844 is separated from the projecting portion 843 c of the ball extracting movable member 843 and the counterclockwise movement of the ball extracting movable member 843 is counterclockwise. Motion restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is positioned immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843 b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 94 (b)). As a result, the ball releasing passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the gaming balls entering from the payout openings 831a and 832a contact the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removing movable piece 843 is pivoted counterclockwise in a front view to open the ball removing passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removing passages 831e and 832e and discharged downward from the ball removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In this embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with a weight attaching portion 843d, the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward by screwing in and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portion 843d. And when the restriction on the pivoting in the counterclockwise direction in the front view is released, the lower end of the deballing movable piece 843 is projected into the deballing passages 381 e and 832 e by the weight of the deballing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be made easy to turn in the direction (counterclockwise in front view).

  Further, in a normal state in which the ball extracting lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball extracting passages 831e and 832e, the gaming ball entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a is attached to the main body 843a of the ball releasing movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, it is possible to vibrate the ball removing movable piece 843 by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dirt, etc. which are pinched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removing movable piece 843 and the inner surface of the ball removing passage 831e, 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate by biting in dust or the like.

  In addition, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attachment portion 843d formed as the through hole, the weight can be removed from the movable member 843 even if the movable member 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long time without being detached from the (weight attachment portion 843d). In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removal movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. Cost can be reduced.

  By the way, when the ball removing passage 843e closes the ball removing passages 831e and 832e for a long period of time, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable member 843 and the rotating shaft is rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls entering from the payout opening 831a and 832a are in contact with the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the lock is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, thereby causing an impact of the contact. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831 e and 832 e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball releasing lever 844 is operated to open the ball releasing passages 831 e and 832 e, the ball releasing movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removing operation can be surely performed. Workability at the time of maintenance can be improved.

[4-6 c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the lower side of the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-like upper full tank base 851 open at the rear side, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 851 and the front side is open. A box-like upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing apparatus pressing member 853 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing apparatus 830 upward are provided.

  Also, the upper full-ball-path unit 850 has an upper outlet ball socket 850a which is open upwards so that gaming balls can pass upward in a region from the left-right center to the left in front view on the upper surface, and Is formed between the upper ball-out opening 850b which is open upward to allow the game ball to pass through at the part of the upper part, the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852 and received by the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a An upper ball storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which gaming balls circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a lower portion of the upper ball discharge passage 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage At the lower end of the passage 850c, a full tank outlet 850e opened downward at a site excluding the normal outlet 850d, a normal outlet 850d and a full tank outlet 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  Also, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 is an upper upper ball-opening passage 850g for guiding the gaming ball entering from the upper ball-opening inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion opened downward at the lower end of the upper ball-opening passage 850g. And a ball outlet 850h. In the upper full tank passage unit 850, the normal outlet 850d, the full tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are sequentially opened downward from the left side in front view. In addition, the upper full tank path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

  The upper full ball passage unit 850 is assembled to the dispensing unit 800, and the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a is located directly below the dispensing outlet 831b of the dispensing device 830, and the upper ball removal inlet 850b is It is located directly below the ball outlet 831 c of the dispenser 830. Also, when the upper full-tank passage unit 850 is assembled to the delivery unit 800, the normal outlet 850d, the full-tank outlet 850e, and the upper ball outlet 850h are normally guided paths of the lower full-tank passage unit 860. Openings 861, a full tank guide passage 862, and a lower ball removal guide passage 865 are respectively directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper full tank path unit 850, the gaming balls dispensed by the dispensing device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlet 831b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper dispensing ball receptacle 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the gaming ball that has entered into the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper discharge ball socket 850a opens immediately below the upper discharge ball socket 850a. The normal outlet 850d is released.

  When the inside of the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be stored, and furthermore, the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with gaming balls The outlet 850d is in a closed state. When the gaming ball enters into the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. When the amount of gaming balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the dividing pieces 850f, the gaming balls that have newly entered the upper ball storage passage 850c overcome the dividing pieces 850f and become full. It is discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and is sent to the lower tray 322 through the filling channel 862 of the lower filling channel unit 860.

  In this manner, the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper tray 321 according to the storage amount of the gaming balls in the upper tray 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6 d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the dispensing unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full ball channel unit 850 in the dispensing unit base 801. The lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming ball discharged from the normal outlet 850 d of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward to guide it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. And a full induction channel 862 for guiding game balls discharged from the full tank outlet 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward to the full tank receptacle 274 of the door frame 3 from the front end, A guideway opening / closing door 863 for opening and closing the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 And a closing spring 864 urging the front end opening of the

  In addition, the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 guides the gaming balls discharged from the upper ball outlet 850h of the upper full-tan ball path unit 850 forward and from above the center right end in the front-rear direction on the substrate unit base 910 of the substrate unit 900. A lower ball out guideway 865 is provided for release into.

  In the lower full-tan ball route unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full-tan guide path 862, and the lower open ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in front view. The rear ends of the normal guide path 861, the full guide path 862, and the lower ball removal guide path 865 open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full guiding path 862 extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lower than the width at which the game balls are arranged side by side. Furthermore, the full induction passage 862 usually extends forward at a lower position than the induction passage 861. The normal induction passage 861, the full induction passage 862, and the lower ball out induction passage 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 which can be divided up and down as shown in the drawing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached at a front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guideway 861 and the full induction way 862 and is closed by a closing spring 864 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. It is energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860, the full induction channel 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal induction channel 861 in a front view, normally It is placed at a lower position by the height of the ball. And, the guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached rotatably around an axis extending in the front and rear direction, generally at a position below the guideway 861 and at the left side of the full induction passage 862.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 has a disk-like base 863a rotatably mounted, and a first door plate 863b extending in a flat plate shape obliquely from the base 863a to the upper left side and closing the front end opening of the usual guideway 861 A second door plate 863c extending flatly to the right from the base 863a and capable of closing the front end opening of the full induction channel 862; and an extension 863d extending flatly from the base 863a to the lower left side The operation projection 863 e protrudes forward from the front end of the extension 863 d and can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the door cover 3 with the door opening / closing contact portion 281.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 does not have to close the openings, as long as the game balls can not pass. The actuating projection 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base 863a in a front view shape, and is inclined so that the front end surface projects forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is biased in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is from below the front end opening of the full induction passage 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By being in contact with the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

  In the lower full tank passage unit 860 of the present embodiment, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the front end is the ball passing passage 273 in the far cover unit 270 of the door frame 3, the full tank reception 274 and the door opening / closing It is attached to the position which opposes the contact part 281 (refer FIG. 112). And, in the state where the doorway 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, nothing is in contact with the operation projection 863e in the state where the doorway 3 is open to the body frame 4. Thus, the second door plate 863 c is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, and is stopped in a state in which the second door plate 863 c is in contact with the boss 867 a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located at the front of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 and close the front end opening (FIG. 111). See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the gaming balls in the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can not move forward from the front end opening, and even when the door frame 3 is opened, the normal induction passage 861 and full induction There are no spills of gaming balls from the road 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door open / close contact portion 281 of the far cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 abuts on the front end face of the operation projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 The inclination of the front end face of the projection 863 e acts on the urging force of the closing spring 864 to turn the guide path opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view. As a result, the first door plate 863 b and the second door plate 863 c that normally closed the front end opening of the induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening. The front end opening of the full tank induction passage 862 is in an open state (see FIG. 111 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate 863 b is located below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate 863 c is located above the front end opening of the full induction passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end opening of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4 and The through ball passage 273 and the full ball receiving hole 274 of the far cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank ball receptacle 274 side.

  In this manner, the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 are made different by vertically varying the front end openings of the normal induction passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 and rotating the induction passage opening / closing door 863. Since the opening and closing of the induction passage opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, the opening / closing mechanism of the normal passage 861 and the full induction passage 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively enlarged, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more gaming balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper tray 321 of the door frame 3 is full of gaming balls and can not release the gaming balls to the upper tray 321. When the player pays out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full-tan ball path unit 860 is full of game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guide path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it flows to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank channel 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. Thereafter, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is full of the game ball in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game ball can not be supplied to the lower plate 322, the fall cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are filled with gaming balls when the movable piece 278 is rotated by the storing passage in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full detection sensor 279. Is notified, and the payout of the gaming ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is cancelled.

  The game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the far cover unit 270, for example, when the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279. In the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank induction passage 862 of the lower full tank passage unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850 c of the upper full tank passage unit 850. When the game ball of the above is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, since it is possible to store more gaming balls than conventional pachinko machines, in the gaming state in which many gaming balls are paid out, such as during a big hit, the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 It is possible to reduce the need to be concerned about being filled with gaming balls, and to allow the player to concentrate on and play a big hit game.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board | substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment is demonstrated with reference to FIG. 91 thru | or FIG. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 is attached to the back of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 with the board unit base 910 attached to the back side of the body frame base 600 in front view. The speaker unit 920, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side in front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and having the power supply board housed therein, and the back side of the speaker unit 920 are interface controlled An interface control board box 940 in which the boards are accommodated, and a payout control board mounted over the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and in which a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of gaming balls is accommodated. And a box 950.

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door main body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for. The dispensing device 830 is controlled by the dispensing control substrate 951 accommodated in the dispensing control substrate box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the entire configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the left front. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from behind. Further, FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 120 is a perspective view seen from the front showing only the front component and the game panel in the game board, and FIG. 121 is a perspective view seen from the back showing only the front component and the game panel in the game board.

  As shown in the figure, the gaming board 5 of the present embodiment has a gaming area 5a in which a gaming ball is hit when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape is substantially square in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. Rows are attached by inserting a game ball into the game area 5a, which is attached to the plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game contents to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game balls are implanted in a predetermined gauge array (not shown) at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game situation based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player On the front side of the game panel 1100, the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the back side of the 1100 so as to be visible from the front side, the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the back side of the game board side effect display device 1600, It further comprises a front unit 2000 to be attached and a rear unit 3000 to be attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100.

  The outer periphery of the game panel 1100 is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel plate 1110 and the panel plate 1110 is held. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first start port 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball, a gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game ball, and the game ball pass the gate unit 2003 The second start-up port 2004 where the game balls can be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by the player, and the first start-up port 2002 or the first A lower large winning opening 2005 and an upper large winning opening 2006 are provided which allow the game ball to be accepted in any of the special lottery result or the second special lottery result.

  In addition, the start opening unit 2100 mounted immediately above the out opening 1151 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and having the first start opening 2002, and the inner rail 1002 in the front view left of the start opening unit 2100 A side unit 2200 mounted along the side and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and mounted to the right of the starting opening unit 2100, one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening A frame shape attached to the top of the attacker unit 2300 having the 2004 and the lower large winning opening 2005, the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2300 and having the upper large winning opening 2006 And the center character 2500 of the.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the box-like back box 3010 whose front is open and the back surface of the back box 3010 so as to detachably attach the game board side effect display device Lock mechanism 3020, a lower left ball passage unit 3030 attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010, and a lower right ball passage unit 3040 attached near the lower right front end of the back box 3010 There is.

In addition, back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board 3060 attached to the left of the opening 3010 a on the rear surface of back box 3010, a lamp drive board cover 3061 covering the rear of lamp drive board 3060, and back box 3010. A motor drive board 3062 mounted below the opening 3010a in the rear view of the opening 3010a, a motor drive board cover 3063 covering the rear of the motor drive board 3062, and a rear view of the back box 3010 mounted in the lower left corner And a panel relay board 3064.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 mounted along the upper side and the left side at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back up movable rendering unit mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a back lower movable presentation unit 3200 mounted below the opening 3010a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable drawing attached to the right of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the lower back of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and the back of the front movable effect unit 3200 Back-to-back movable production unit 3500 and back-to-back movable production unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and back-to-back movable A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in a front view, an inner shape penetrating in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is divided by the inner shape of the inner shape. The front component 1000 is an outer rail 1001 which extends in an arc shape along the circumferential direction clockwise from the lower end on the left side to the left side in front view and extends to the upper right oblique side passing through the upper end in the left and right direction in front view; The inner rail 1002 disposed inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extending in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left-right direction to the upper left diagonal upper part And an out guiding portion 1003 which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined to be lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 which are linearly inclined such that the right end is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. The right rail 1005 extends from the right end of the front component 1000 along the right side of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, and the upper portion is curved inward of the front component 1000; A stop portion 1006 is connected to the upper end of the base 1001 and is in contact with the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1001. The stop unit 1006 acts as a buffer member that relaxes and relieves the force of the game ball thrown into the game area 5a, and is formed of rubber or the like in this example. The material of the stopper 1006 is not limited to rubber as long as it acts as a buffer member.

  Also, the front component 1000 is pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and has a closed position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space with the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member (not shown) which is pivotable in the direction of rotation to be pivotable only between the open position where it and the outer rail 1001 are open and to return to the closed position side. It has 1007.

5-2. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 to FIG. The game panel 1100 holds the outer periphery of a flat panel panel 1110 formed of a transparent synthetic resin and the outer periphery of which is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface. The panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position which is the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 (see FIGS. 120 and 121 and the like) are formed in the panel plate 1110 so as to penetrate front and back and to attach the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 from the rear side. Further, in the panel holder 1120, a plurality of mounting holes for mounting the back unit 3000 and a plurality of positioning holes are formed on the rear surface.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1151 of the panel board 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component 1000. Thus, the gaming balls having flowed down to the lower end of the gaming area 5a can be guided by the out guiding portion 1003 to the out port 1151 on the rear side, and can be discharged to the back side of the gaming panel 1100 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lower toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled on the game board 5, the substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side. Thus, the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1151 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and are formed on the bottom surface It is possible to discharge downward from the discharged portion 1201 (see FIG. 87).

5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. Main control unit 1300 is removably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board (not shown) for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 which accommodates the payout control board 951 and is attached to the board holder 1200. Is equipped.

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is broken next to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the trace of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the improper opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the tampering with the main control board is enhanced.

[5-5. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the gaming area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player's side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs to display a game state (game situation), a result of a normal lottery, a result of a special lottery, and the like.

  The function display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, has a status indicator consisting of a single LED for displaying the gaming status, and two regular lottery results to be drawn by passing the game ball to the gate section described later. It was drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port which will be described later, and the normal hold indicator which consists of two LEDs that display the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part. The first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery results, and the first special hold number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending holdings of the game ball to the first starting opening , A second special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game ball to the second starting opening described later, and the person in charge of receiving the game ball to the second starting opening When the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", etc., the second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of pending It mainly comprises a round display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the open / close pattern.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, a symbol, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[Second embodiment of function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 may be provided in the door frame right side unit 550 described above. Details will be described below with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190.

  FIG. 189 is a perspective view showing a state where the right unit left decoration member 554 is removed from the door frame right side unit 550. As shown in FIG. FIG. 190 is a perspective view showing a state where the right unit left decorative member 554 is attached from the state of FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 189 and 190, the function display unit 1400 in this example is installed between the accommodation recess 553 d and the right unit left decoration member 554 in the accommodation recess 553 d in which the right unit left decoration member 554 is disposed. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the player side through the right unit left cover 555.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 in this example has a portion overlapping the function display unit 1400 as a function display area 1400a, and has a plurality of through holes. When the right unit left decoration member 554 is disposed in the state where the function display unit 1400 is disposed in the storage recess 533 d, the plurality of LEDs provided in the function display unit 1400 and the function display area 1400 a in the right unit left decoration member 554 are provided. Since the through holes are arranged in an overlapping manner, a plurality of LEDs provided in the function display unit 1400 are configured to pass through the holes provided in the function display area 1400a.

  In addition, in the function display area 1400a, for example, the letters “15”, “5”, and “2” are written as the number of rounds at the time of a big hit near the through hole corresponding to the round display in the function display unit 1400. Therefore, it is possible to recognize the game state (game situation), the normal lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

  In addition, since the function display area 1400a of this example is disposed in the door frame right side unit 550, it is not necessary to dispose in the game board as in the prior art, and the design and assembly of the pachinko machine 1 are concerned. Cost can be reduced.

  In addition, when you replace the game board with new stand exchange and the like, it is possible that the LED which is lighted differs depending on the constitution of the game board and the other specification (for example, the round number at the time of big hit etc differ), but in that case Even if there is a game status (play status), the design of the function display area 1400a is changed (replacement of the right unit left decoration member 554) in accordance with the function display unit 1400 corresponding to the game board 5 newly installed as a new base ), Ordinary lottery results, special lottery results, etc. can be recognized.

[5-6. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 to FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the back side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000.
More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 substantially at the center. The gaming board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the center character 2500 in the assembled state of the gaming board 5. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full color display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the game board side effect display device 1600 has two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side in a front view, and a right projecting outward from the right side in the front view. And a fixed piece 1602. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface in a front view left side in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion of a back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen directed forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the locking mechanism, and lower the locking mechanism It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 121. FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear of the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the peripheral control unit 1500 is not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 for controlling the effect to be presented to the player based on the control signal from the main control board, and the effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 A ROM substrate provided with a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the display of the image, a ROM storing the effect image, the effect sound, the effect control program, etc., the peripheral control substrate 1510, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the ROM substrate And a peripheral control board box 1520 accommodating the above.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 128. FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as viewed from the back. FIG. 124 (a) is a perspective view of the starting port unit of the front unit as viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 124 (b) is a perspective view of the starting port unit as viewed from the rear lower side. FIG. 125 (a) is a perspective view of the side unit of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 (b) is a perspective view of the side unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 126 (a) is a perspective view of the front unit from the top front, FIG. 126 (b) is a perspective view of the front unit from the top rear, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the center part of the front unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the center part of the front unit as viewed from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward more than the front surface of the panel board 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112 It projects rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving the game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 always open and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open to accept game balls at different positions, the gate unit 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a for detecting passage of the game balls, and the game balls as gates Lottery by receiving the game ball to the second start port 2004 and the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 that can receive the game ball according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing the part 2003 The lower special winning opening 2005 and the upper special winning opening 2006 are provided, which allow the game ball to be accepted in any of the first special lottery results or the second special lottery results.

  A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are disposed in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first start port 2002 is disposed right above the out port 1151 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is disposed on the lower side from the center in the vertical direction at the right side in the game area 5a. The second start port 2004 is disposed immediately below the gate unit 2003. The lower large winning opening 2005 is disposed below the second starting opening 2004 and near the lower end in the game area 5a. The upper large winning opening 2006 is disposed above the second starting opening 2004 and near the upper end in the game area 5a.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the out port 1151 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a front view left of the start port unit 2100. Side unit 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 and having a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 and to the right of the starting opening unit 2100 one general winning Attached above the attacking unit 2300 having the opening 2001, the gate section 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the lower large winning opening 2005, the starting opening unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attaching unit 2300 And a frame-shaped center character 2500 having a large winning opening 2006.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, start port unit 2100 of front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. 124 and the like. The starting opening unit 2100 is disposed immediately above the out opening 1151 near the lower end in the middle in the left-right direction in the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 has a first start port 2002.

  The starting opening unit 2100 includes a unit base 2101 attached to the panel plate 1110, and a ball receiving member 2102 attached to the upper front of the unit base 2101 and projecting forward and forming a first starting opening 2002. A box frame shaped front decoration base 2103 attached to the front of the unit base 2101 below the ball receiving member 2102 and projecting forward and extending left and right, and the front surface of the unit base 2101 in the front decoration base 2103 And a front central decoration substrate 2104 mounted on the front surface and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  Also, the starting opening unit 2100 is attached to the front of the front decoration base 2103 and has a predetermined decoration and a light emitting decoration by the front center decoration substrate 2104 and a rear side of the unit base 2101. And a guiding passage member 2106 for guiding the gaming ball received in the first starting opening 2002 downward, and a guiding passage member 2106 mounted on the first starting opening 2002 for detecting the gaming ball received And a first starting opening sensor 2107.

The ball receiving member 2102 is formed in the shape of a container in which the upper side and the rear side are opened, and can receive the game ball from the upper side as the first starting opening 2002 and can guide it backward. The front decoration base 2103 extends equally to the left and right around the ball receiving member 2102 (first start port 2002), and is inclined so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the left and right ends. The front decoration member 2105 extends in the left and right direction, and has a fake portion 2105a formed in a plate shape with substantially the same size and shape as the lower large winning opening door member 2352 for opening and closing the lower large winning opening 2005 described later. ing.
The fake unit 2105 a can make the player illusion that there is a big winning opening below the first starting opening 2002.

[Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. Side unit 2200 has three general winning openings 2001.

  The side unit 2200 is attached to a flat unit base 2201 attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 and extending in an arc along the inner rail 1002, and attached near the upper edge of the lower front of the unit base 2201. Together with the two first ball receiving members 2202 projecting forward and forming a general winning opening 2001 and attached to the left from the center in the left-right direction on the front of the unit base 2201 and projecting forward and the general winning opening A second ball receiving member 2203 forming 2001, a side decoration substrate 2204 disposed behind the unit base 2201 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the side decoration substrate 2204 so as to cover from the rear And a substrate cover 2205 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2201.

  The unit base 2201 extends in an arc shape so as to become higher toward the left in front view. Further, the unit base 2201 has a first shelf 2201 a inclined downward toward the right at a position on the left and above the portion to which the second ball receiving member 2203 is attached. It has a protrusion 2201 b protruding to the bottom. The unit base 2201 has translucency, and is decorated to emit light by the side decoration substrate 2204.

The first ball receiving member 2202 is formed in the shape of a container in which the upper side and the rear side are opened, and can receive the game ball from the upper side as the general winning opening 2001 and can guide it backward.
The second ball receiving member 2203 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and is under the second shelf 2203 a and the second shelf 2203 a that are inclined to lower right on the upper surface It has a ball receiving portion 2203 b which is opened to the upper left on the side and forms a general winning hole 2001.

  The substrate cover 2205 is formed in a shallow box shape whose front is open, and is opened upward at a portion behind the ball receiving portion 2203 b of the two first ball receiving members 2202 and the second ball receiving member 2203. And has a bowl-like guiding portion 2205a which extends back and forth and guides the gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward.

  With the side unit 2200 attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the board cover 2205 is inserted into the opening 1112 and the game ball received by the general winning opening 2001 is paneled by the guiding portion 2205a. It can be guided to the rear of the plate 1110.

[Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIG. 126 and the like. The attacker unit 2300 is disposed at the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2300 has one general winning opening 2001, a gate section 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a lower large winning opening 2005. Specifically, the second start opening 2004 is disposed on the right side of the general winning opening 2001, and the gate unit 2003 is disposed immediately above the second start opening 2004. The lower large winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004. The lower large winning opening 2005 extends from the position immediately below the second starting opening 2004 rightward to the left beyond the position directly below the general winning opening 2001.

  The attacker unit 2300 has a general winning opening 2001 and a gate portion 2003, and is attached to the unit base 2301 attached from the front to the panel plate 1110, and attached to the upper front of the unit base 2301. A start opening front member 2302 to be decorated, a shelf member 2303 mounted on a front surface of the unit base 2301 between the start opening front member 2302 and the lower large winning opening 2005 and projecting forward, and a unit base 2301 A ball guiding member 2304 mounted on the rear side for guiding the gaming ball received in the second start port 2004, and a gate sensor 2305 mounted on the unit base 2301 for detecting passage of the gate portion 2003 of the gaming ball And.

  In addition, lower attachment decorative board 2306 is disposed at a position corresponding to the position between front starting opening member 2302 and shelf member 2303 on the rear side of unit base 2301 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof. And a grid cover in the form of a grid frame mounted between the lower attachment decorative substrate 2306 and the unit base 2301 and the substrate cover 2307 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 to cover the rear of the lower attachment decorative substrate 2306 And a member (not shown).

  In addition, the attacker unit 2300 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2301 with a second start opening unit 2320 that opens and closes the second start opening 2004. And a lower large winning opening unit 2350 for opening and closing the key.

  In the unit base 2301, the gate portion 2003 protrudes forward from the upper end portion, and one general winning hole 2001 protrudes forward from the lower left portion of the gate portion 2003 in a front view. Further, the unit base 2301 is provided with a bowl-shaped hook portion 2301 a for guiding the gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2001 backward. The unit base 2301 is translucent.

  The start opening front member 2302 is heightened from the upper end of the pair of side walls 2302 a extending forward along the left and right sides of the second start opening 2004 and the upper end of the side wall 2302 a on the left in front view An extending guiding portion 2302b, a flat outer wall portion 2302c extending forwardly with a distance allowing game balls to pass from the side wall portion 2302a on the right side in front view, a pair of side wall portions 2302a, and a guiding portion And 2302 b, and a flat plate-like front plate portion 2302 d connecting the front ends of the outer wall portion 2302 c. The left end of the guiding portion 2302 b extends to the left relative to the gate portion 2003.

  The upper surface of the shelf member 2303 extends such that the left end is lowered from immediately below the right side wall portion 2302 a of the starting opening front member 2302 to immediately below the right and left center of the general winning opening 2001. Accordingly, when the gaming ball rolls on the upper surface of the shelf member 2303 and is released from the left end when the lower large winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the lower large winning opening 2005 is accepted with a very high probability. The ball guiding member 2304 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 2307. In addition, the ball guiding member 2304 passes the gaming ball received in the second starting opening 2004 between the second starting opening unit 2320 and the lower large winning opening unit 2350 at the rear of the unit base 2301. It is configured to discharge downward after being guided rearward than the unit 2350.

  The second start port unit 2320 has a front case 2321 having a second start port 2004 at its front end and mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and a rear case 2322 mounted on the rear side of the front case 2321 The second start opening door member 2323 and the second start opening door member 2323 which are slidably supported in the front case 2321 so as to be able to project forward and backward forward and backward relative to the second start opening 2004, are driven to slide back and forth A second starting opening sensor 2325 mounted so as to be sandwiched between the starting opening solenoid 2324 mounted in the case 2322 and the front case 2321 and the rear case 2322 and detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 2004 And have.

  When the second starting opening unit 2320 is assembled to the attacker unit 2300, the front end of the front case 2321 passes through the unit base 2301 from the rear and is positioned substantially flush with the front surface of the unit case 2301. Thus, the second start port 2004 opens forward. Then, in the normal state where the starting opening solenoid 2324 is not energized, the second starting opening door member 2323 is immersed in the front case 2321 and the gaming ball flowing down the front of the second starting opening 2004 is the second starting opening It passes downward through the second starting port 2001 without entering 2004. On the other hand, when the starting opening solenoid 2324 is energized, the second starting opening door member 2323 is in a state of projecting forward than the second starting opening 2004. In this state, when the game ball flows down the front of the second start opening 2004, the game ball abuts on the second start opening door member 2323 and the flow direction changes from the bottom to the rear, and the second start opening 2004 It is accepted. The gaming balls received in the second starting opening 2004 are detected by the second starting opening sensor 2325, and then guided by the ball guiding member 2304 and discharged downward.

  The lower large winning opening unit 2350 can be opened and closed by a unit case 2351 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2301 and having a rectangular lower large winning opening 2005 extending to the left and right, and the lower large winning opening 2005 A horizontally-long rectangular flat-shaped lower large winning opening door member 2352 rotatably attached to the 2351 and a unit case 2351 are attached and driven to open and close the lower large winning opening door member 2352 in accordance with the game state. Lower large winning opening solenoid 2353, lower large winning opening sensor 2354 attached to unit case 2351 for detecting gaming balls received in lower large winning opening 2005, and lower surface of unit case 2351 attached to upper surface Lower large winning opening decorative board 2355 on which multiple LEDs are mounted and lower large winning opening solenoid 235 Includes inferior vena winning hole sensors 2354, starting opening the solenoid 2324, and a second start hole sensor 2325 or the like, the attacker unit relay board 2356 relaying the connection between the main control board, the.

  The lower large winning opening 2005 opens forward. The lower large winning opening door member 2352 capable of opening and closing the lower large winning opening 2005 is rotatably mounted such that the left and right ends of the lower side are pivotable by the unit case 2351, and the upper side is rotated forward and downward. By doing this, it is possible to open the lower large winning opening 2005 from the closed state.

  In the lower large winning opening unit 2350, in the normal state where the lower large winning opening solenoid 2353 is not energized, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 is erected to close the lower large winning opening 2005. Then, when the lower large winning opening solenoid 2353 is energized according to the gaming state, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side is slightly higher than the lower side It will be in the state of being located. That is, the lower large winning opening door member 2352 is inclined to be higher from the lower side of the lower large winning opening 2005 to the front.

  In this state, when the gaming ball flows down the front of the lower large winning opening 2005 and abuts against the lower large winning opening door member 2352, the distribution direction changes from lower to rear due to the inclination of the lower large winning opening door member 2352 It will be accepted by the lower prize winning opening 2005. The gaming balls received in the lower large winning opening 2005 are discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2351 after being detected by the lower large winning opening sensor 2354.

[Center feature]
Next, the center product 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. The center role 2500 is arranged slightly above the center of the front view above the starting opening unit 2100 and the attacking unit 2300 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the game board side effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 can be viewed from the front through the inside of the frame. The center role 2500 has an upper prize winning opening 2006 that can accept game balls according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, a part of the lower side of the center product 2500 extends downward between the starting opening unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2300 to the vicinity of the lower right rail 1004. That is, the center character 2500 separates the game area 5a from side to side.

  The center part 2500 is a flat frame-like flange 2511 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 along the periphery of the opening 1112 that is largely opened at the center of the panel plate 1110, and protrudes forward from the flange 2511 Frame-shaped center base having a front peripheral wall 2512 for preventing game balls from entering the cage frame, and a rear peripheral wall 2513 projecting backward from the flange 2511 and inserted into the opening 1112 It is equipped with 2510.

  The front peripheral wall 2512 of the center base 2510 is formed over substantially the entire periphery of the flange 2511 except for a part of the lower side. The position of the front circumferential wall 2512 at the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side is the highest.

  In addition, the center character 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 and the warp entrance 2520 in which the game balls in the game area 5a can be opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral left lower part of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center base 2510. Warp passage 2521 for guiding the game ball to the lower end near the left end in the frame of the center base 2510, Warp outlet 2523 where the game ball can pass through at the downstream end of warp passage 2521, and Warp outlet 2523 And the stage 2530 for releasing the supplied game balls into the game area 5a while extending horizontally along the lower side within the frame of the center base 2510. ing.

  The stage 2530 is curved so that the left and right ends are high and the left and right sides of the part corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a are the lowest, and bulging out so that the lowest part is slightly higher There is. The stage 2530 is formed in a portion corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a and is formed in the central guiding groove 2531 which is notched from the front end to the rear and the two lowest portions. And a fan-shaped side guide groove 2532 which is lowered toward the end and which spreads to the left and right. In a state where the gaming board 5 is assembled, the first starting opening 2002 is located directly below the central guiding groove 2531 and the gaming ball released from the central guiding groove 2531 into the gaming area 5a is extremely likely to have the first probability. Acceptable at the starting port 2002.

  Further, the center character 2500 is attached to the right end of the front peripheral wall 2512 in front view and is brought into contact with the stopper 1006 and rolled back toward the upper game space 2541 to be described later. A unit 2540 is provided. The guide portion 2540 is formed as a separate member from the center character 2500 and attached to the center character 2500 so as to extend the right end portion of the front side of the front circumferential wall 2512 in the front view right direction. Further, the induction portion 2540 is formed of a resin that is stronger than the center part 2500. Specifically, the center part 2500 is formed of PC resin (polycarbonate resin), but the induction part 2540 is formed of POM resin (polyacetal resin) which is more durable than PC resin.

  As described above, when the game ball driven into the game area 5a abuts against the stopper 1006, the gaming ball relaxes its momentum, but some of the game balls are blocked by the stopper 1006 and the front peripheral wall of the center piece 2500. It is bounced back to the upper side of the part 2512. In addition, most players turn the handle 302 to the maximum to hit the game ball in order to bring the game ball into contact with the stop portion 1006, so the momentum of the game ball to be hit is a winning to the first starting opening 2002 It is getting stronger than the usual game to aim at. When the game ball thus driven in is bounced back by the stopper 1006, it frequently falls on the upper side of the front peripheral wall 2512 of the center combination 2500 and the center combination 2500 may be damaged. Therefore, while attaching the front end right end portion of the top side of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 to the center character 2540 as the guiding portion 2540 of another member, the center character 2540 is prevented from breakage by being formed of POM resin excellent in durability. ing. In this example, since only the induction portion 2540 is formed of POM resin without forming the entire center part 2540 of POM resin, even if the induction portion 2540 is damaged, only the induction portion 2540 should be replaced. It can be repaired easily, even at the time of breakage.

  In addition, a guiding portion 2540 described later is attached to the center character 2500 so as to have a step with the front circumferential wall portion 2512. In this example, the upper side of the front circumferential wall 2512 is attached above the upper side of the guiding portion 2540 in a front view. As a result, when the gaming ball bounced back by the stopper 1006 reaches this step, it will be returned in the direction of the upper game space 2541 without being able to go over the step. In addition, the upper side of the induction portion 2540 has a low coefficient of friction due to the smooth mirror finish, and the game ball which can not go over the step between the front peripheral wall portion 2512 and the induction portion 2540 flows down to the upper game space 2541 Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging due to the gaming balls staying on the upper side of the guiding portion 2540.

  Moreover, in this example, the upper side of the induction | guidance | derivation part 2540 is formed of the solid member longer than the right side (right and left sides). The upper side of the guiding portion 2540 needs a certain length or more to receive the game ball bounced back by the stopping portion 1006, but the space in the game area 5a is made equal by making the upper side and the right side Narrows, and the degree of freedom in designing a gaming machine decreases. Therefore, by forming the right side (right and left sides) of the guiding portion 2540 shorter than the upper side, the space in the vertical direction of the gaming area 5a in the front view is secured to prevent the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine.

  In addition, the center character 2500 is sandwiched between the guiding portion 2540 and the blocking portion 1006 and the upper right entrance where the game ball in the game area 5a is open for entry, and the upper side of the center base 2510 below the upper right entrance. Along the right side of the center base 2510 from the right end of the front view at the bottom of the upper game space 2541 and the upper game space 2541 of a predetermined area where the upper big winning opening 2006 is opened on the left side in front view Extending downward and having a lower end bent leftward to allow gaming balls to flow, and a lower right outlet 2543 opening downward at the lower end of the right passage 2542. .

  The upper right entrance extends vertically with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the upper portion extends upward. The upper game space 2541 is formed in an area where the game ball can move sufficiently in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction. In the upper game space 2541, the upper winning prize opening 2006 is opened to the left in front view than the upper right entrance. Further, the upper game space 2541 has a guide portion 2541a which is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right in the front view right under the upper right entrance. The guide balls 2541a allow the game balls falling through the upper right entrance to roll along the bottom of the upper game space 2541 without jumping up in the upper game space 2541 and smoothly guide them to the right passage 2542. It can be done.

  The right passage 2542 has a plurality of protrusions 2542a extending in the vertical direction alternately extending in the vertical direction on the front and rear wall surfaces, and the game balls come into contact with the protrusions 2542a to allow the game balls to flow down. Can be attenuated. The lower right outlet 2543 is opened right above the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2300 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted on the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) also between the lower right outlet 2543 and the gate portion 2003.

  Furthermore, the center prize 2500 includes an upper winning opening door 2550 closing the upper winning opening 2006, and an upper winning opening solenoid 2551 that opens and closes the upper winning opening door 2550 according to the game state. , A large winning opening sensor 2552 for detecting gaming balls received in the upper large winning opening 2006, and a rear guiding path 2553 for guiding the gaming balls detected by the upper large winning opening sensor 2552 to the rear than the flange portion 2511 The rear discharge port 2554 which is open at the rear end of the rear guiding path 2553 and through which gaming balls can pass, and branches from the middle of the rear guiding path 2553 and which is below the gaming ball along the right side of the center base 2510 in front view A relief passage 2555 for guiding the air and an outlet 2556 opened at the lower end of the relief passage.

  The upper large winning opening door member 2550 opens and closes the upper large winning opening 2006 opened to the left in front view than the upper right entrance in the upper gaming space 2541. The upper large winning opening door member 2550 is rotatably mounted about an axis extending in the front-back direction in the vicinity of the bottom surface of the upper gaming space 2541 at the lower end on the left side of the upper right entrance It extends to the ceiling of the upper play space. The upper prize winning opening door member 2550 is upright in the normal state and closes the upper winning prize opening 2006. When the upper large winning opening solenoid 2551 is energized according to the gaming state, the upper end is rotated so as to move to the right in front view, and the upper large winning opening 2006 is set so that the gaming ball can be received Open. In this state, the upper end of the upper prize winning opening door member 2550 is higher than the lower end and is positioned to the right in a front view than the upper right entrance. Therefore, the game balls dropped to the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 through the upper right entrance are guided by the upper winning prize opening door member 2550 and accepted in the upper winning prize opening 2006.

  The game ball received in the upper large winning opening 2006 is detected by the upper large winning opening sensor 2552 disposed at the lower left of the upper large winning opening door member 2550, and then to the rear of the flange portion 2551 by the rear guiding path 2553 It is induced. The rear discharge port 2554 which is opened at the rear end of the rear guide path 2553 is usually by the outer peripheral surface of the first decorative surface 3310 a of the back right rotation decoration body 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is closed. Therefore, when the gaming ball is not discharged from the rear discharge port 2554, the gaming ball enters the escape passage 2555 branched immediately before the rear discharge port 2554, and is discharged downward from the discharge port 2556 through the escape passage 2555. .

  The center character 2500 also includes a front movable presentation unit 2560 attached to the upper side of the center base 2510 and a front movable presentation unit 2570 attached to the lower side of the center base 2510. The front movable movable unit 2560 of the center character 2500 is vertically movably mounted within the frame of the center base 2510 and has a decorative according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and a front movable decorative body 2561; The front movable movable body decorative substrate (not shown) mounted on the front side of the upper movable decorative body 2561 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and mounted on the rear side of the center base 2510 And a front driving motor 2563 for raising and lowering the front movable decorative body 2561 according to.

  The table below the center base 2510 is attached to a portion of the lower side of the center base 2510 that extends downward from the stage 2530, and has a flat and translucent surface with a decoration on the front surface. The lower decorative body 2571, and the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 which are rotatably mounted in front of the frontal decorative body 2571, and the rear of the center base 2510 A front drive motor 2575 for rotating the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 attached to the side according to the game state, and the rear side of the front decorative body 2571 And a movable decorative body decoration substrate 2576 mounted on the front side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  In the front movable movable effect unit 2570, the first rotary decorative body 2572, the second rotary decorative body 2573, and the third rotary decorative body 2574 are formed in a shape imitating a shuriken, and are driven by the front lower driving motor 2575. , Each rotate in the same direction.

[Overall configuration of back unit]
Next, the entire configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 129 to 132. FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, a game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape open at the front and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 having a square opening 3010 a in the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for removably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600 and a gaming ball attached near the lower left front end of the back box 3010 and guided by the game winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200 downward The left lower ball passage unit 3030 for releasing onto the substrate holder 1200, and the game ball and the upper large winning hole 2006 which are attached near the lower right front end of the back box 3010 and received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 The outlet 330 of the lower right lower base 3303 in the lower right left movable effect unit 3300 described later A right lower ball passage unit 3040 for guiding the gaming balls discharged from a and the gaming balls discharged from the outlet 2556 of the relief passage 2555 of the center character 2500 downward and discharging them onto the substrate holder 1200; It has a general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the passage unit 3030 and the lower right ball passage unit 3040 and detecting the game ball received by the general winning opening 2001.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to the left of the opening 3010 a on the back surface of the back box 3010 in a rear view, and a lamp driving substrate 3060 for driving each decoration substrate based on a control command from the peripheral control substrate 1510 A lamp drive board cover 3061 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the drive board 3060, and a rear face of the back box 3010 is attached below the back of the opening 3010a. The motor drive board 3062 which drives each drive motor based on the control command, the motor drive board cover 3063 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear of the motor drive board 3062, and the back face of the back box 3010 The main control board and each winning opening sensor, each winning opening solenoid, etc. It includes a panel relay board 3064 relaying the connection, a.

  Furthermore, the back unit 3000 includes a back peripheral decoration unit 3080 mounted along the upper side and the left side at the front end of the back box 3010, and a back up movable rendering unit mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. 3100, a back lower movable presentation unit 3200 mounted below the opening 3010a near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back right movable drawing attached to the right of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 The unit 3300, the back left movable effect unit 3400 attached to the left of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and the lower back of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and the back of the front movable effect unit 3200 Back-to-back movable production unit 3500 and back-to-back movable production unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and back-to-back movable A back corners movable direction unit 3600 attached to the respective left and right sides of the output unit 3500, and a.

[Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 129 to 132 and the like. The back box 3010 has a box shape open at the front, an opening 3010 a which is squarely penetrated to the back wall, and a frame-like liquid crystal mounting which protrudes in a flat shape at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010 a Portion 3010b, two fixed grooves 3010c which are recessed outward from the inner side in the rear view right side in the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixed piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b And a notch 3010d which is cut away from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the left side in a rear view.

  The opening 3010 a is formed in substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010 b is formed in a size in which the game board side effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably mounted vertically on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout 3010d in the rear surface.

  In addition, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010 e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010 e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

  Moreover, although the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the boss | hub for attaching each movable presentation unit etc., an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the back box 3010 in the position suitably.

[Low left ball passage unit]
Next, the lower left ball passage unit 3030 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 129 to 132 and the like. The left lower ball passage unit 3030 is attached to the back box 3010 at a position corresponding to the rear of the side unit 2200. The left lower spherical passage unit 3030 is formed in an L shape whose side extending in the vertical direction is shorter than the side extending in the left and right direction in a front view shape, and the inside is hollow. The lower left ball passage unit 3030 is provided with three entrances 3031 which are opened forward on the front face and through which the game balls can pass. These three entrances 3031 are formed at positions corresponding to the three guiding portions 2205 a in the side unit 2200.

  In the lower left ball passage unit 3030, the hollow interior is inclined downward toward the right in the front view, and the gaming balls entering from the three entrances 3031 are discharged downward near the right end of the lower surface Ru. A general winning opening sensor 3050 is attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030, and the gaming ball entering the inside from the entrance 3031 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower left ball passage unit 3030.

[Bottom ball passage unit]
Next, the lower right ball passage unit 3040 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 129 to 132 and the like. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is attached to the back box 3010 at a position corresponding to the rear of the attacker unit 2300. The lower right ball passage unit 3040 is opened forward and has a first entrance 3041 into which gaming balls received at the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 can enter, and a back right movable effect unit 3300 described later. Of the second entrance 3042 which is open upward and directly below the discharge port 3303a which is open on the lower surface of the lower surface, and the center of the second entrance 3042 which is opened upward in the upper right of the front view And a third entrance 3043 through which the game ball discharged from the outlet 2556 can flow by flowing through the relief passage 2555 of the accessory 2500.

  The lower right ball passage unit 3040 discharges the gaming balls entering the first entrance 3041, the second entrance 3042, and the third entrance 3043 downward through the independent paths. In the lower right ball passage unit 3040, a general winning opening sensor 3050 for detecting a game ball entering the first entrance 3041 is attached. That is, the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2300 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3050 attached to the lower right ball passage unit 3040.

[Back rim decoration unit]
Next, the back peripheral decoration unit 3080 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 129 to 132 and the like. The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 is attached along the upper side and the left side of the front end of the back box 3010 at a portion corresponding to the upper side, the left side, and the lower left side of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a. The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 is attached to the rear side of the C-shaped light transmitting back peripheral decoration member 3081 and the back peripheral decoration member 3081, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. And a substrate cover 3083 which covers the rear of the back peripheral decoration substrate 3082 and is attached to the rear of the back peripheral decoration member 3081.

  The back peripheral decoration unit 3080 can emit light and decorate the back peripheral decoration member 3081 by appropriately emitting the LED of the back peripheral decoration substrate 3082. Further, in a state where the game board 5 is assembled, the front of the back peripheral decoration member 3081 can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent panel board 1110, and the outside of the center part 2500 in the game area 5a is decorated.

[Moveable production on the game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 133 to FIG. FIG. 133 is a front view of the game board showing the movement of the front movable decoration of the front movable presentation unit in the center character. Also, FIG. 134 is a front view of the game board showing the back decoration of the back up movable effect unit in the back unit in the first appearance position, and FIG. 135 is the back up decoration of the back up movable effect unit in the back unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows a state of the appearance position in which the body is in the second appearance position, and the back bottom front first decoration body and the back bottom front second decoration body of the back bottom front movable effect unit.

  Further, FIG. 136 shows that the pair of shutters are opened with the first decorative surface of the back right rotation decoration of the back right movable effect unit in the back unit facing forward, and the back left rotation of the back left movable effect unit It is a front view of the game board which shows the state of the appearance position of the back left projecting decorative body in a state where the first decorative surface of the decorative body is directed forward. Further, FIG. 137 shows a game board showing the back right rotation decoration of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotation decoration of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with the respective second decoration surfaces directed to the front. It is a front view of. Further, FIG. 138 shows a game board showing the back right rotation decoration of the back right movable effect unit and the back left rotation decoration of the back left movable effect unit in the back unit with the respective third decoration surfaces directed to the front. It is a front view of.

  Further, FIG. 139 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back and back rotation decorative body of the back and back back movable effect unit in the back unit is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a front view at the rising end position. Further, FIG. 140 shows that the back decoration of the back and back movable presentation unit in the back unit is rotated in the clockwise direction in a front view at the rising end position, and the back four corners of the back four corners and movement presentation unit It is a front view of the game board in which a decoration body shows the state of an appearance position. FIG. 141 is a front view of the game board showing the back four corner first decorative body of the back four corners movable presentation unit in the back unit in the state of the appearance position.

  In this gaming board 5, as shown in FIG. 114 etc., in the normal state, the display screen of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 disposed rearward through the frame of the center role 2500 is good from the player side It can be viewed on the Also, in the normal state, the front movable decorative body 2561 of the front movable movable effect unit 2560 in the center character 2500 is rising, and the first rotary decorative body 2572 of the front movable movable unit 2570, the second rotary decoration The body 2573 and the third rotating decoration 2574 stop rotating. Furthermore, in the normal state, the back top decoration 3152 of the back top movable effect unit 3100 is located at a retracted position above and behind the frame of the center character 2500 in a state where the top and bottom are reversed, and a part is It projects downward below the upper side in the frame of the center role 2500 and can be viewed from the player side.

  In a normal state, the first lower back decoration 3209 and the second lower back decoration 3212 of the lower back fore movable effect unit 3200 become the back of the lower part of the center character 2500 and viewed from the player side. It is located in a difficult withdrawal position. In the normal state, the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotating decoration 3310 and the back left rotating decoration 3410 of the back left movable effect unit 3400 have the first decoration surfaces 3310a and 3410a frontward (front). It has stopped rotating in the state of facing it, and a pair of shutters 3312 of the back right rotation decoration 3310 is closed and two back left projecting decorations 3421 of the back left rotation decoration 3410 are back left rotation decoration It is located at a retracted position where it is embedded into the body 3410 in an invisible manner.

  Furthermore, in the normal state, the back decoration of the back of the movable effect unit 3500 is located at the falling end position, and the lower part of the center character 2500 is visible from the player side. I am in the frame. Also, in the normal state, the back four corner first decorative body 3624, 3664 and the back four corner second decorative body 3633, 3673 of the back four corner movable effect unit 3600 are within the frame of the center character 2500 that is difficult for the player to see It is also located at the outward retraction position.

  From the normal state, this gaming board 5 is displayed on the surface according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Moveable production unit 2560, front down moveable production unit 2570, back up moveable production unit 3100, back down front moveable production unit 3200, back right moveable presentation unit 3300, back left moveable production unit 3400, back down moveable production unit 3500, and The back four corner movable effect unit 3600 performs a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, for example, in the front movable motive effect unit 2560 of the center character 2500, the front movable movable body 2561 is lowered from the normal position by the rotational drive of the front drive motor 2563, and the game board side effect display device Located at the top front of the 1600 (see FIG. 133). As a result, the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600 is covered by the movable decorative body 2561 on the front, so that the player can be made to think that the game state may change, and a sense of expectation for the game It can be enhanced.

  Further, in the upside-down movable effect unit 2570 of the center character 2500, the first downturn decoration 2572, the second downturn decoration 2573, and the third downturn decoration 2574 are rotated by the under-back drive motor 2575 in a lump ( See FIG. 127 (b)). This makes it possible for the player to think that something is good, and to increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  Furthermore, in the back-up movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the back-up decorative body 3152 is lowered from the retracted position to the first appearance position in a state where the back-up decorative body 3152 is reversed by rotating the back-up drive motor 3103 See Figure 134). In this state, the pair of openings 3152a of the back surface decoration 3152 and the sub decoration 3157a facing in the openings 3152a may be partially viewed from the player side through the center character 2500 frame. it can. This makes it possible for the player to be surprised as well as being entertained by the appearance of the character, since the predetermined character being scolded by the back surface decoration body 3152 looks upside down from above. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Also, in this state, when the back upper sub decoration 3157 is reciprocated to the left and right by the rotational drive of the back upper sub drive motor 3159, the pupil of the predetermined character being crawled by the back upper decoration 3152 (sub decoration 3157a ) Can be surprised to the left and right, which can further surprise the player and can enjoy the movable effect.

  In the back-up movable effect unit 3100, the back-up decorative body 3152 is moved to the second appearance position further below by the rotation drive of the back-up drive motor 3103 with the back-up decorative body 3152 in the first appearance position. (See FIG. 135). When the top and bottom of the predetermined character being scooped by the back top decoration 3152 is reversed when the back top decoration 3152 descends from the first appearance position to the second appearance position, the top and bottom are in a normal state As it descends while rotating, the motion of the back decoration 3152 becomes a dynamic motion, which can strongly attract the player's attention and can greatly surprise the player.

  When the back surface decoration body 3152 is in the second appearance position, as shown in the figure, the top and bottom of the predetermined character being scooped by the back surface decoration body 3152 is in a normal state, and the back top decoration body 3152 is It is located approximately in the center of the frame of center character 2500. As a result, the back surface decoration body 3152 becomes noticeable in the game area 5a, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the player can be made to foretell that the advantageous game state will occur. . Even in this second appearance position, the pupils of the predetermined character being scolded by the back decoration 3152 can be reciprocated to the left and right by the rotational drive of the back upper auxiliary drive motor 3159, which makes the player more enjoyable. Can.

  In the back up movable effect unit 3100, the back up decorative body 3152 is moved up and down between the retracted position and the first appearance position, or moved up and down between the first appearance position and the second appearance position, and the retreat position And the second appearance position can be raised and lowered, and at the time of the first appearance position and the second appearance position, the pupil can not be made to move around, so those operations can be appropriately performed. A variety of movable effects can be performed by combining them, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  In the back lower movable executability unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, when the back upper decorative body 3152 of the back upper movable effect unit 3100 is at the second appearance position, the back of the back lower drive motor 3202 rotates the back of the retracted position. The lower front first decorative body 3209 and the back lower front second decorative body 3212 are moved to the appearance position located in the frame of the center character 2500 (see FIG. 135). Thus, as shown in the figure, the first lower back decoration 3209 with the hand in front of it is positioned in front of the upper back decoration 3152 with the head (face) in front of it, so that the predetermined character casts a spell. As a result, the player can have a strong impact, and the expectation for the generation of the advantageous gaming state can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the back right movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000, the pair of shutters 3312 are separated by the back right shutter solenoid (not shown) in the normal state (the state where the first decorative surface 3310 is turned forward and stopped). Then, the inner decoration 3313 is faced forward from between the shutters 3312 (see FIG. 136), and the inner decoration 3313 is lit and decorated. Thus, it is possible to indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotation decoration body 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the gaming state changes, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotation decoration 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304 to stop the second decoration surface 3310b forward (front) (see FIG. 137). Thereby, since the back right character decoration 3318 of the second decorative surface 3310b can be viewed from the player side, the player can be made to foretell the arrival of a chance by the recognition of the back right character decoration 3318.

  Furthermore, in the back right movable effect unit 3300, the back right rotation decoration 3310 is rotated by the back right drive motor 3304 to stop the third decoration surface 3310c forward (front) (see FIG. 138). As a result, the ball guiding member 3322 spirally extending in the vertical direction in the back right rendering space 3321 can be viewed from the player side, so the gaming balls are supplied to the player in the back right rendering space 3321. In other words, it can be made that the upper prize winning opening 2006 opens, which can increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, the back left rotation is performed by driving the back left decoration solenoid 3422 in a normal state (the state where the first decorative surface 3410 is turned forward and stopped). A back left protruding decorative body 3421 protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the decorative body 3410 (see FIG. 136). This makes it possible to surprise the player by projecting the back left projecting decorative body 3421 from the cylindrically rotating back left rotating decorative body 3410, and at the same time it is thought that something is good. Can increase the sense of expectation for the game.

  Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decoration body 3410 is rotated in a giraffe by rotational driving of the back left drive motor 3404. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sign that the gaming state changes, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decoration 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the first decoration surface 3410a forward (front) (see FIG. 114 and the like). Since the first decoration surface 3410 a is provided with a door decoration 3411 that simulates a door, the shutter 3312 of the first decoration surface 3310 a of the back right rotation decoration 3310 in the back right movable effect unit 3300 is provided to the player. Similarly, the door decoration 3411 can be thought to be open, and the expectation for the game can be heightened.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decoration 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the second decoration surface 3410b forward (front) (see FIG. 137). As a result, since the back left character decoration 3413 of the second decorative surface 3410 b can be viewed from the player side, the player can be made to foretell the arrival of a chance by the recognition of the back left character decoration 3413.

  In the back left movable effect unit 3400, the back left rotation decoration 3410 is rotated by the back left drive motor 3404 to stop the third decoration surface 3410 c forward (front) (see FIG. 138). And although illustration is omitted, when red light is emitted by the LED of the back left third decoration substrate 3417 in this state, the red pattern can be projected on the back left projection portion 3415 and blue light is emitted. Then, the blue design can be projected on the back left projection unit 3415. As a result, the symbol projected on the back left projection unit 3415 can indicate to the player the arrival of a chance or the like, and the player can be entertained or the expectation can be heightened.

  The back right movable effect unit 3300 and the back left movable effect unit 3400 rotate the back right rotation decoration body 3310 and the back left rotation decoration body 3410 at the same time as the right and left ends within the frame of the center character 2500 ( It is possible to perform movable effects on the left and right sides of the game board side effect display device 1600, and increase the player's sense of expectation with the rotating back right rotating ornament 3310 and the back left rotating ornament 3410 to lower the interest rate It can be suppressed. In addition, by appropriately selecting the decorative surface on which the back right rotation decoration 3310 and the back left rotation decoration 3410 are stopped, the pattern of the movable effect can be diversified, and the player can not easily get bored. .

  Furthermore, in the back-to-back movable effect unit 3500 of the back unit 3000, the back-to-back back-and-back drive motor 3512 is rotationally driven to raise the back end back rotation decorative body 3568 to the rising end position substantially centered within the center character 2500 frame. Rise to Then, when the back bottom back rotation decoration 3568 is in the rising end position, the back bottom back rotation rotation motor 3553 rotates the back bottom back rotation decoration 3568 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view (see FIG. 139). ). As a result, the back and back rotary ornament 3568 slightly desired to the player side above the stage 2530 of the center character 2500 is raised and positioned in the center of the center character 2500 frame, thereby the player. Can make you think that there is something good to surprise you, and can increase your sense of expectation for the game. In addition, it is possible for the player to further increase the sense of expectation for the game by turning the rotating decorative body 3568 back and forth in the counterclockwise direction.

  In the back-to-back movable effect unit 3500, when the back-to-back rotary decorative body 3568 is at the rising end position, the back-to-back back-to-back rotary decorative body 3568 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front. Then, the four back and back rotating ornaments 3568 open and enlarge so as to be separated from each other (see FIG. 140). As a result, the diameter of the lower back turning decorative body 3568 is larger than that when it is rotating counterclockwise, so that the player's expectation for the game can be further enhanced.

Further, in the back four corner movable presentation unit 3600 of the back unit 3000, the back four corner first decorative bodies 3624, 3664 are positioned within the frame of the center character 2500 from the retracted position by rotational driving of the back four corner drive motors 3615, 3655. Elevate to the emerging position (see Figure 141).
This makes it possible to surprise the player by the appearance of the four back four corner first decorative bodies 3624 and 3664, and to suggest the arrival of a chance or the like.

  Further, in the back four corner movable effect unit 3600, the back four corner second decoration 3633, 3673 is rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position located in the frame of the center character 2500 by the rotational drive of the back four corner drive motor 3615, 3655. Move (see Figure 140). This allows the player to be surprised by the appearance of the four back four corner second decorative bodies 3633, 3673 extending radially around the center of the center character 2500, and something good It can be made to think that there is, and it can be made to raise expectation for a game. In the back four corners movable effect unit 3600, when the back bottom back rotating decorative body 3568 of the back bottom back movable effect unit 3500 is at the rising end position, by rotating the back four corners second decoration 3633, 3673 to the appearance position, the center It can appear as if a large shuriken appeared in the frame of the character 2500 (see FIG. 140). As a result, it is possible to convince the player of the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game as much as possible and to enhance the interest in the game.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (in particular, the main control MPU mounted on the main control board 1310) will be described. FIG. 142 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first performs various registers and main processing as the processing of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch (not shown) is operated. Initializes the data stored in the control built-in RAM. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to the operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU receives the clear signal at the time of power on. When it is determined that the above-mentioned data is stored, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, backup processing is executed to save information (for example, various flags etc.) indicating the progress of the game in the main control built-in RAM. Then, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the RAM clear switch is not operated, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). Execute recovery processing to recover to the state according to the information. In addition, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the initialization process is performed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 in the initial state.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, when the first special symbol displayed variably on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display are stopped. Special random number (first special random number, second special random number) to be subjected to lottery processing for display mode in the variation, fluctuation to be provided to lottery processing for a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol Based on the special random number, the random number, the reach random number to be subjected to the lottery process whether or not the reach effect is performed as the game effect performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When it is determined to be a big hit, symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) to be subjected to lottery processing for determining the type of big hit, an operation trigger of the second starting opening door member 2323 Etc. made per random number to be subjected to such a lottery process in Toraku (usually random), and a random number counter for storing random numbers such.

  In this example, the first random symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first start opening 2002 is started, the second start opening 2004 is started. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, the reach randomization execution ratio can be obtained by acquiring from different counters where the range of random numbers to update reach random numbers is different. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol may be different as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and may be different from the first reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (variation random number) which is not related to the drop of the random number is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 mS.

  FIG. 142 (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2305, the first starting opening sensor 2107, the second starting opening sensor 2325, the upper large winning opening sensor 2552, the lower large winning opening sensor 2354, the general winning opening sensor 3050 Detection signals from various sensors are input. Then, next, in step S13, random number update processing for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, the random number counter (the special random number, the ordinary random number) related to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol among the random numbers is updated The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the special symbol as the process of step S14. Run. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (a first special symbol process flag, a second that indicates the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM) The corresponding processing is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process according to the hit which becomes the operation trigger of the second start opening door member 2323. . Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.
In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is configured such that the drive frequency of the second start opening door member 2323 is higher in a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state (except for some big hits). It becomes a structure which performs the said lottery process (what is called time saving state). In this embodiment, such a time saving state is realized by shortening the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, in the control of the time saving state (referred to as time saving control), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to one-half (per 100%) and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is not The second start opening door member 2323 of the second start opening 2004 is for example, shortened when shortening to a predetermined time (for example, 0.08 seconds) shorter than the time saving state and the lottery result of the above normal symbol is hit. After moving forward for 5.5 seconds to enable the reception of gaming balls to the second starting opening 2004, the game is retracted again to disable the reception of gaming balls to the second starting opening 2004.

  On the other hand, in the non-time-saving control, the second symbol is set by setting the selection probability of the normal symbol to 0% and setting the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol to a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds) It becomes impossible to accept the game ball to the mouth 2004. It should be noted that the winning probability of the normal symbol may be 0% or more even in the non-time-short state, and in this case the winning probability (for example 50%) lower than that of the time-short state When the second start opening door member 2323 of the second start opening 2004 becomes shorter than the short time state, for example, for 2 seconds, it is possible to receive the game ball to the second start opening 2004 again. You may make it back and make acceptance of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 2004 impossible.

  That is, in the non-time-short state, since the winning probability of the normal symbol is 0%, it is impossible to win the game ball in the second starting opening 2004 even if the player strikes right in this case. Therefore, in the non-time-short state, the game ball is fired aiming at the left side of the center character 2500 so that many game balls win in the first start hole 2002 instead of the second start hole 2004 (so-called "left It is preferred to strike ").

  On the other hand, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 100%, and in order to advance the second starting opening door member 2323 of the second starting opening 2004 for a long period (in this example, 5.5 seconds), In this case, winning the game ball to the second start port 2004 is facilitated by hitting the right. Therefore, in the non-time-short state, the game ball is fired aiming at the right side of the center character 2500 so that many game balls win the second start hole 2004 instead of the first start hole 2002 (so-called "right It is preferred to strike ").

  In addition, as the time saving control, control to increase the winning probability of the normal symbol above the non-time short state, control to shorten the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol above the non-time short state, the second of the second starting port 2004 Control to extend the period for advancing the second start opening door member 2323 more than the non-short time state, control to increase the number of times for advancing the second start opening door member 2323 of the second start opening 2004 above the non-short time state, first Control to shorten the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol in the special symbol display and the second special symbol display (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol in the game board side effect display device 1600) than in the non-time saving state Or any combination (or all) may be performed.

  Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. A command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like. Next, in step S17, a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process processing is transmitted to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the like.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs information output processing for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer, for example, as processing of step S18.

  Then, next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S19, the first starting opening sensor 2107, the second starting opening sensor 2325, the upper large winning opening sensor 2552, and the lower large winning opening sensor 2354. When the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3050 and the like are in the on state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 951 so that a prize ball corresponding to those signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 834 to pay the player a prize ball. In the present example, when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 2002 and the first starting opening sensor 2107 is turned on, "three balls", the gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting is When the mouth sensor 2325 is turned on, "one ball", the game ball is won in the large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006, lower large winning opening 2005), the upper large winning opening sensor 2552 or lower large winning opening sensor 2354 When the game ball is in the "14 ball" when the game state is on and the game ball is in the general prize hole 2001 and the general prize hole sensor 3050 is in the on state, the "10 ball" prize balls are paid out to the player. ing.

  In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 next executes storage processing of checking increase and decrease of the number of holdings as processing of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first receives the first start port sensor 2107. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the on state (with the ball entering the first starting opening 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the random number counter and incorporated into the main control The first starting opening passage processing such as storing in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number on condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2325 is in the on state (there is entering the second starting opening 2004) (step S33) The second starting opening passage processing such as storing it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, control of the big hit game state is performed A big hit control process (step S40) is performed. In the big hit control process, the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol and the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol is "4R normal big hit" , When it comes to a mode that suggests either "4R latent probability big hit" or "4R definite variation big hit", the lower large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or after the lower large winning opening 4R big hit gaming state (it's just long open 4R big hit gaming state) which repeats opening and closing pattern (round) to be closed when detected by the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 that 9 gaming balls are won in 2005 It may be called to control, and as a result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the change display stop of the first special symbol, it became the mode which suggests "16R sudden probability big hit" Control the 16R big hit gaming state (sometimes called just the short open 16R big hit gaming state) which repeats the opening and closing pattern to close 16 times after opening the lower large winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example 0.5 seconds) When the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol becomes the mode which suggests "8R probability variation big hit", the lower large winning a prize mouth 2005 is opened for a long time (for example 28.5 After the second opening / closing pattern to be closed when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that nine gaming balls have won the second large winning opening 2005 after the second large winning opening 2005 is shorted Control the 8R big hit gaming state (sometimes called just the long open 8R big hit gaming state) that repeats the opening and closing pattern to be closed 8 times after opening the time (for example 0.5 seconds) And when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol becomes a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the upper large winning a prize mouth 2006 open for a long time (for example 28.5 16R big hit gaming state (simply open for a long time) repeating the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the above-mentioned large winning a prize mouth sensor 2552 that 9 game balls are won after winning a second big winning prize opening 2006 16R big hit game state may be called) to execute processing to control. It should be noted that the lower prize winning opening sensor 2354 detects that nine gaming balls have won in the lower prize winning opening 2005 after opening the lower prize winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) as the 4R big hit gaming state The opening and closing pattern (round) to be closed when being displayed is repeated four times, but the opening and closing pattern to be closed after opening the lower large winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is repeated 12 times thereafter By actually executing the 4R big hit gaming state control, even when the big hit gaming state is reached, the open / close pattern for controlling the lower large winning opening 2005 to be always opened and closed 16 times regardless of the type of the big hit It is good, after having opened the lower large winning a prize opening 2005 for a long time as an 8R big hit gaming state (for example 28.5 seconds) or that nine gaming balls have won in the lower large winning a prize opening 2005 The opening and closing pattern to be closed when detected by the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 is repeated eight times, and then the opening and closing pattern to be closed after opening the lower large winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is not performed You may do so. That is, as long as the number of repetitions of rounds capable of receiving the game ball in the lower large winning opening 2005 is substantially the same, the number of times is not limited to the above.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a game is mainly performed based on a left-handed state in which a game based on the winning of the game ball in the first start port 2002 is executed and a game mainly based on the game ball in the second start port 2004. Control to either of the right-handed state and the left-handed state. Specifically, when the time saving control is being performed, control is performed in the right-handed state, and when time reduction control is not performed, control is performed in the left-handed state. In the left-handed state, a big hit gaming state of up to 8 rounds of long time opening is executed, and in the right-handed state, a big hit gaming state of up to 16 rounds of long time opening is executed. It is possible to obtain more balls than in the left-handed state.

  In the big hit control process, after performing the opening control of such big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006, lower large winning opening 2005), each set processing of high probability flag, time saving flag, and time saving number counter Run. The high probability flag is a flag indicating a high probability state, and is used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 148 described later and is set until the next big hit occurs (the first shown in FIG. 153 described later Special symbol stop processing or second special symbol stop processing not shown).

  The short-time flag is a flag indicating that time-shortening control is being executed (low probability time short state, high probability time short state), and a big hit (time low control state, low probability time short state) is performed after the big hit gaming state is over 4R probability variation big hit, 16R hit probability hit, 8R probability variation big hit, 16R big hit gaming state based on) is set when you end the big hit game state, when it becomes the next big hit first special symbol stop processing which is shown in Figure 153 which it mentions later Or it is reset by the 2nd special symbol stop processing which is not illustrated.

  In addition, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0" (Step S37) The first special symbol process processing including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S38), and the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol storage area The second special symbol including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter showing the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S37) Process processing is performed (step S39). Thus, in this example, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0".

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting opening sensor 2107 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 144. In step S41, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value It is judged whether it is "4" which is upper limit value (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put variable display control of the first special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S43 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Next, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S41. Store in and complete the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S42 that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value (if so-called "irregular sphere" occurs), the first special symbol variation display Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of step S43 to step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area among the storage areas of the main control built-in RAM (step S45), by finishing the process, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2325 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 145. In step S51, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value It is determined whether it is "4" (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S53 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is incremented (one added). Then, as the process of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM, each random number acquired in the step S51. Store in and complete the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S52 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value (if so-called "irregular ball" occurs), the variation display of the second special symbol Control is not newly suspended. That is, without executing the processing of step S53 to step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S55), by finishing the process, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  When the number of reservations for the first special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002, a command (first suspension) indicating the number of reservations for the first special symbol in the storage process (step S20) Set the number specification command 0 to 4) and send it to the peripheral control board 1510. If the number of reservations for the second special symbol changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, the above storage process (step In S20), a command (second pending number specifying command 0 to 4) instructing the pending number of the second special symbol is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In addition, when a random number is stored in the first special symbol non-lottery storage area on the basis of the game ball entering the first starting opening 2002, a command to notify the random number (first irregular ball specification command) is also described above. The random number is set when the random number is stored in the second special symbol non-lottery storage area based on the fact that it is set in the storage process and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the gaming ball enters the second starting port 2004. The command to be notified (the second ball-ball designating command) is also set by the storage process and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. It should be noted that when the first and second ball commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the storage process, the memory contents of the first special symbol non-lottery storage area and the second special symbol non-lottery storage area are cleared. .

  FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are program modules similar to each other, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process processings will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. First special random symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is executed such as lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol Normal processing (step S80)

  2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol (step S81 )

  3. About the fluctuation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the above first special symbol display based on the fluctuation random number, and the fluctuation mode of the effect display executed on the game board side effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process in which lottery process and the like are performed (step S82)

  4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display is stopped (step S83)

  5. The above-mentioned first special symbol display unit displays the above-mentioned first special symbol display mode when the variation control stop mode of the first special symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 142).

  FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 147, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S101. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, then it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the main control built-in RAM as processing of step S102. The same main control built-in RAM is the random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol Read from Then, next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special holding number counter is counted down, and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) relating to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol hold storage area a to first special symbol hold storage area d), and the start winning combination to the first starting opening 2002 The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and in response to the occurrence of the start winning to the second starting opening 2004 The random numbers extracted are stored sequentially from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area.
Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

After that, as the process of step S105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol.
Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81), the process is ended.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S105).

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability short time state) when the current gaming state is high (step S111), the high probability time shown in FIG. The jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is in the low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 149 (A) is selected (step S113). The determined big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 149 (A), the big hit judgment table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-time short) for each kind of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) The jackpot determination table for low probability used in the case of the state and the low probability time reduction state, and the jackpot determination at high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short state, high probability time short state) And a table. And, in the jackpot determination table at low probability to be compared with the first special random number, it matches with the jackpot judgment value indicating that one kind of first special random number is won in the jackpot, and the first 399 kinds of first random numbers The first special random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the outlier judgment value indicating that the special random numbers are the above outliers (big hit probability at low probability; 1/400). Also, in this example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, which is referred to compare with the second special random number, the first special random number Matches with the jackpot judgment value indicating that one kind of second special random number is won as a jackpot similarly to the low probability big hit judgment table to be referred to for comparison with the above, and the 399 kinds of second special random numbers deviate from the above The second special random numbers are respectively associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-range judgment value indicating that the value is (big hit probability at low probability; 1/400).

  Also, in the high probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the first special random number, 10 kinds of first special random numbers match the big hit judgment value, and 390 kinds of first special random numbers become out of judgment value The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with each other (big hit probability at high probability; 1/40). Further, in the present example, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, the first special random number is determined in the high probability big hit determination table to be compared with the second special random number. Similar to the high probability big hit judgment table to be referred to for comparison with the big hit judgment value indicating that 10 kinds of second special random numbers are won for the big hit, 390 kinds of second special random numbers are not included above The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the out-of-range judgment value indicating that the (big hit probability at high probability; 1/40). It should be noted that the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table to be compared with the first special random number and the jackpot judgment table referred to in order to be compared with the second special random number (the number of jackpot judgment values is the same number The jackpot judgment value may be made different (the jackpot probability is common), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be made different (the jackpot probability may be made different). In this case, at least one of the jackpot judgment values of the jackpot judgment table at the low probability and the jackpot judgment table at the high probability may be made different (both may be made different).

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, if it is determined to be a big hit (step S115 ), The big hit flag which shows that the particular fluctuation has been won in big hit is set (step S116), it ends big hit decision processing.

  If it is determined in step S115 that there is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is high probability non-short state, the reach determination table in high probability non-short state, and when the gaming state is high probability short state Reach determination table in the high probability time short state to be used in the case, reach determination table in the low probability state used in the low probability state (low probability short time state and low probability time short state), and Is equipped. Then, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, it is matched with the reach determination value indicating that one kind of reach random number reaches the reach, and matched with the reach determination value indicating that the 71 reach random numbers do not reach The reach random numbers are associated with one another.

  In the reach determination table in the low probability state, one reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state are reached The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability time reduction state.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short state, six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state and the low probability state are reached The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 66 random numbers reach, and the reach determination value indicating that the 66 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-short state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability low state and the low probability state (low probability low state, low probability non-short state). Be enhanced.

  If the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), it is determined that the reach is lost (step S120), the variation Sets a reach flag indicating that it is a reach, and the process ends (step S121).

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first of all, as shown in FIG. 150. The result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol, that is, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 149 (B) and selects the first symbol random number and the symbol read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. The big hit symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of the variation control stop of the first special symbol is determined by comparing with the designated symbol determination table (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 149 (B), the symbol determination table has random numbers according to the determination results (4R normal big hit, 4R latent big hit, 4R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit, 8R positive big hit, 16R positive big hit) The first symbol random number and the second symbol random number) are stored in a form associated with each other. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different ing.

In particular,
1. Opening and closing to be closed when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that the lower large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that the lower large winning opening 2005 has nine game balls The game ball can enter the lower large winning opening 2005 by repeating the pattern 4 times (easily) to control the 4R big hit gaming state, and then the low probability short time until the big hit gaming state occurs (so-called normal state) 4R normal big hit to control

  2. Opening and closing to be closed when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that the lower large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that the lower large winning opening 2005 has nine game balls The game ball is controlled to the 4R big hit gaming state where it is possible (easier) to enter the lower big winning opening 2005 by repeating the pattern 4 times, and then to the high probability non-short state until the big hit gaming state occurs, high 4R latent probability big hit to perform the effect that it is difficult to determine that it is controlled to the probability state

  3. Opening and closing to be closed when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that the lower large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that the lower large winning opening 2005 has nine game balls Control the game ball to enter the lower large winning opening 2005 (easy) 4R big hit gaming state by repeating the pattern 4 times, and then control to the high probability time reduction state until the big hit gaming state occurs 4R probability variation big hit

  4. The game ball controls the 16R big hit gaming state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning prize port 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed after opening the lower big winning prize port 2005 for a short time (for example 0.5 seconds) 16 times The game is controlled to the high probability time short state until the big hit gaming state occurs, and the effect of whether the transition control to the high probability time short state is suddenly controlled without the occurrence of the big hit gaming state in the middle of the game is executed

  5. Opening and closing to be closed when the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 detects that the lower large winning opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that the lower large winning opening 2005 has nine game balls After repeating the pattern eight times, the game ball can enter the lower large winning opening 2005 by repeating the opening / closing pattern to be closed after opening the lower large winning opening 2005 for a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (easy ) 8R probability variation big hit to control to 8R big hit gaming state, then to high probability time short status until big hit gaming state occurs

  6. Opening and closing that is detected when the upper prize winning opening sensor 2006 detects that nine gaming balls have won in the upper prize winning opening 2006 after opening the upper prize winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) The game ball is controlled to 16R big hit gaming state where it is possible (easier) 16R big hit game state by repeating the pattern 16 times, then it is controlled to high probability time short state until the big hit game state occurs next 16R probability variation big hit

In the left-handed state, the gaming ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the driving of the second starting opening door member 2323 is not performed. Therefore, in the left-handed state, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 will occur, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Except for the case, only the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display is executed, the big hit related to the first special symbol (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R positive probability big hit, 8R positive variation Jackpot) will occur.
Similarly, the gaming ball does not win in the first starting opening 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 will occur, and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol Only the display is executed, and a big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R low probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) associated with the second special symbol will occur.

  In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol it was possible to repeat the opening and closing pattern which opens the lower large winning a prize mouth 2005 for a long time (for example 28.5 seconds) at maximum, related to the second special symbol In the big hit, the opening and closing pattern for opening the large winning opening 2006 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) can be repeated 16 times, and the lower winning opening 2005 related to the first special symbol is opened for a long time ( For example, the above-mentioned large winning opening 2006 related to the second special symbol is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) than the ratio (31%) determined to the 8R probability variation big hit that repeats the opening and closing pattern to 28.5 seconds ) Based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 mainly to set the ratio (63%) determined to 16R probability variation big hit that repeats opening and closing patterns 16 times approximately twice Technique it is possible to obtain a large amount of prize balls mainly compared to the left-handed state a player based on the winning of the game balls to the first start hole 2002 is executed in a right-handed state which is executed.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is decided to be 4R normal big hit, it is decided to be 4R normal big hit symbol as big hit symbol, and when it is decided to 4R latent probability big hit, it is 4R latent probability big hit symbol as big hit symbol. If you decide and decide on 4R probability variation big hit, decide on 4R probability variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol, if you decide on 16R probability big hit symbol, decide on 16R high probability big hit symbol as big hit symbol and decide on 8R positive variation big hit Decide on the 8R probability variation big hit symbol as a big hit symbol. Also, although not shown, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when it is decided to be a 4R normal big hit, it is decided to be a 4R normal big hit symbol as a big hit symbol, and when it is decided to be 4R latent probability big hit, it is 4R latent as a big hit symbol. Big hit symbol is decided, if it is decided to 4R definite variation big hit, it decides to 4R definite variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol, when it decides to 16R positive variation big hit, it decides to 16R positive variation big hit symbol as big hit symbol.

  Also, if the big control flag of the main control board 1310 is not set in step S131, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the first special symbol is out of pattern as the change stop mode (step S136) The count counter is incremented by 1 (step S135 b), and the process proceeds to step S137.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S137, instructs the above lottery result (type of big hit, reach out, or out ( A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set such that the stop symbol form of the first special symbol may be designated)) to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, this process is ended.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 performs display control of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (variation display of left, middle and right decorative symbols) The left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in order (the left, middle and right decorative symbols may be displayed in synchronization with the same symbol and displayed simultaneously). Specifically, as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the variation stop of the decorative symbol displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, the peripheral control unit 1511 uses the received judgment result notification command and 4R normal big hit among the big hit. If it is specified, it is decided to be 4R normal big hit design (the combination of left, middle and right decorative design becomes the same even pattern among the symbols from "0" to "9"), and 4R latent certain big hit among the big hit If it is specified, it is decided to be 4R latent certain big hit symbol (the combination that the left, middle and right decorative symbols similar to 4R normal big hit symbols are the same even symbols among the decorative symbols from "0" to "9") If you identify the 4R probability variation big hit among the big hit, decide it as the 4R probability variation big hit symbol (combination that the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all "1" or "9") 16R bump if specified Big hit design (the left, middle and right decorative designs are determined to be a combination including all the designs of "1", "3", and "5"), and 8R probability variation is specified if 8R probability variation big hit among jackpots is specified Big hit design (the combination of all left, middle and right decorative designs is "5") and 16R of the big hits are identified 16R positive variation big hit design (left, middle and right decorative designs) It is determined that the combination is "7". In addition, when the reach out is specified, the out pattern with reach (the left and right decorative symbols are a combination of the same symbols from “0” to “9” and a combination of symbols different in the inside decorative symbol; reach loss) If it is decided to be a symbol) and the detachment is specified, it is decided to be a different symbol (a combination of at least the left and right decorative symbols among the left, middle and right decorative symbols) with reach reaching When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect), the stop symbol determined is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 151, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is If it is set (step S145), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal disconnection (reach effect Change pattern table (not shown) when out Is selected (step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is ended. Thus, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display only for the variation time determined in this way and the game board side effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the variation display of the special symbol. Effect control will be performed.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, the main control MPU selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in the present example, it is set so as to determine the type type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be performed with the change random number. . For example, among the 241 types of fluctuating random numbers, 164 types of fluctuating random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of fluctuating random numbers are super reach A judgment value (223 to 240) which is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the effects is to be executed, and indicates that 18 kinds of fluctuating random numbers are to execute any of the super reach effects having a high hit probability. Set as). Note that with super reach effect, the expectation of the big hit is higher than that of normal reach effect, and the player's degree of expectation for the big hit gaming state when the super reach effect is executed for the player who desires the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. It is getting higher.

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection provided corresponding to the first special random number and the first symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, it is common to the non-time saving state and the time saving state The variation time of 12 seconds is set. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of disconnection provided corresponding to the second special random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation time of 0.3 seconds as a time saving state Is set, and a variation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-short time state. As described above, the variation time of the first special symbol is made the same in the short time state and in the short time state, and the player is urged to win the game ball to the second starting port 2004 in the short time state. The time for winning the game ball to the mouth 2004 is secured.

  In addition, as described above, in the right-handed state, only the interval where one game ball can pass is provided, and the rolling of the game ball is limited, and guidance to the gate portion 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 is very high probability. Be done. That is, in the right-handed state, the game ball is configured to pass through the gate portion 2003 with an extremely high probability, the normal symbol comes into contact, and the second start opening door member 2323 of the second start opening 2004 is advanced. In this case, the game balls are received by the second starting opening 2004 with a very high probability (approximately all of the game balls hit to the right of the center character 2500). Moreover, in the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to be 100%, and when the normal symbol comes into contact, the second start opening door member 2323 of the second start opening 2004 is a long period (5.5 in this example) It is maintained in the advanced state for a second), and the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004. In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Then, since the game ball is received to the second start port 2004 with extremely high probability when the launched game ball is hit to the right of the center character 2500, the second start port door of the second start port 2004 in a short time state In a state where the member 2323 moves forward and the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004, the game ball in the second start port 2004 is generated at intervals of about 0.6 seconds. In this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of disconnection of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is set to 0.3 seconds which is extremely short as the fluctuation time of the time saving state. . In addition, the interval time from when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped to when the fluctuation display is started again is set to about 0.6 seconds. That is, in the time saving state, the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is extremely shortened compared to the non-time short state (fluctuating time 12 seconds, interval time 0.6 seconds), and the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 Since the difference between the winning interval and the execution interval of the variable display of the second special symbol is narrowed in the time saving state, even if a large number of gaming balls win in a very short time to the second starting opening 2004, the second special symbol The variable display is performed in a very short time to prevent the increase in the number of holdings of the second special symbol, and in the above-described short time state, the number of variable displays per unit time increases significantly as compared with the non-short time state. As a result, in the high probability time-shortened state controlled to shift to the right-handed state, it becomes possible to win the next big hit in an extremely short time compared to the previous gaming machine, and it becomes possible to obtain a large number of prize balls in a short time , The game interest can be improved.

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 152, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special symbol stop process (step S84) in the process of step S173, this process is ended.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 153, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. The display control for causing the first special symbol display to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing as the processing of the first special symbol display processing, and the first game console side effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of the special symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  When the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187), and the big hit game is performed. The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying a message to start the big hit gaming state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the above-mentioned time saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S189), and when the first special symbol process flag is updated to be process transition to the first special symbol normal processing which is an initial value (step S194), this processing is ended. The jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (4R normal big hit start command, 4R low probability big hit) according to the type of big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R low probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R high probability big hit, 8R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) Set the start command, 4R probability variation big hit start command, 16R hit probability big hit start command, 8R probability variation big hit start command, 16R probability variation big hit start command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot gaming state according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921 and the like.

[7. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control unit 1511 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control unit 1511 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 154, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control unit 1511 mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process is started to monitor whether the 16 mS elapsed flag T has been set (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes 2 mS steady processing. In the 2mS steady-state process, a process to count up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16mS elapsed While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed.
As described above, the 16 mS elapse flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in 2 mS steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. When the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process of controlling the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400, the lamp / LED, the speaker 921 and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS. On the other hand, when the 16 mS lapse flag T is not set in step S502 (16 mS lapse flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS lapse flag T is set.

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 mS steady-state processing performed every 16 mS in the sub main processing. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the game is played based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the second fluctuation pattern setting process) Control processing relating to the board side effect display device 1600 and the effect operation unit 400 is executed.

  Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing related to the speaker 921 and the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 3060 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady process ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more by the end of the 16 mS steady process after the 16 mS steady process starts, the 16 mS steady process immediately after the 16 mS steady process starts (command from step S601) Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16mS has elapsed during execution of the 16mS steady process, only the 16mS elapsed flag is set, and when it is determined that the 16mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16mS steady process is completed, the 16mS steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub main processing and the 16 mS steady processing.

[8. Battle production]
Next, winning time shortening control will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 to 160. FIG. In FIG. 156 to FIG. 157, the command analysis that the determination result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command indicating that the reach (reach out, reach per reach) is to be received when controlled to the high probability time short state is the command analysis FIG. 158 is a timing chart of battle effect executed by the game board side effect display device 1600 when identified in the process (step S601), and FIG. 158 to FIG. 160 are the cases where the high probability time short state is controlled; An example of battle effect executed by the game board side effect display device 1600 when it is specified in the command analysis process (step S601) that the determination result notification command indicating that it will be reach and the fluctuation pattern command are received FIG.

  In this example, during the high probability time reduction state, the game board side effect display device 1600 displays a mode in which the main character 1600a walks, and the left, middle and right decorations at the lower left portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 Execute the variable display by reducing the design. Then, when the determination result notification command indicating the reach and the variation pattern command are received, the enemy character 1600b is displayed so as to face the main character 1600a, and the main character 1600a and the enemy character 1600b are confronted. Execute battle rendition. When the received determination result notification command indicates a big hit, the main character 1600a displays a mode in which the main character 1600a wins against the enemy character 1600b as a result of the battle effect, and when the received determination result notification command indicates a release, As a result of the battle effect, an aspect in which the main character 1600a loses to the enemy character 1600b is displayed.

Further, in the battle effect, after the main character 1600a and the enemy character 1600b are displayed facing each other on the game board side effect display device 1600, blackout is temporarily displayed (displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 by turning off the screen And the enemy character 1600b is displayed. Then, one of the main character 1600a and the enemy character 1600b is displayed. It is indicated that a first strike attack will be made by the character displayed after this blackout, and if the main character 1600a is displayed after the blackout, it will always be a big hit.
On the other hand, if the enemy character 1600b is displayed after blackout, it will always be a big hit if the enemy character 1600b is not attacked. As described above, the player can recognize that the main character 1600a is displayed after the blackout and becomes a big hit, and by avoiding the attack of the enemy character 1600b even when the enemy character 1600b is displayed after the blackout. It becomes possible to recognize that it will be a big hit.

  In this way, even if it is decided that a big hit will be made in the middle of the battle production, the battle production is continued after that and the fluctuation display is executed over a long period of time, the special symbol per unit time Since the number of times of the variable display decreases and the number of times of winning the big hit gaming state and the expected value of the winning balls that can be obtained decrease, the player may be disadvantaged and the fun of the game may be lowered. In this example, when it is determined that a big hit will be made in the middle of the battle production, the big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) is controlled open at that time to control the big hit gaming state While starting, it is made to continue the production to execute the battle production to the end. The details will be described below.

  In this example, battle production short and battle production long are provided as fluctuation patterns when reaching during high probability time reduction state, and battle production short is executed only when it is a big hit, and battle production long is a big hit and It is designed to be executed both in the case of and in the case of being out of place. First, the battle effect performed based on the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect short will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 158 (A) to 159 (I). It should be noted that in the high probability time-short state, the game is performed in which the right strike is performed and the game ball is caused to enter the second starting opening 2004, so that (right strike →) It is done.

  As shown in FIG. 158 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to the high probability time short state, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays an aspect in which the main character 1600a is moving on the game board side effect display device 1600. . When the second special symbol process process (step S39) is executed based on the game ball having won the second starting opening 2004 in that state, as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU displays the second special symbol. The variation display of the second special symbol is started on the display unit, and the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command (in this case, the judgment result notification command indicating that a big hit occurs and the fluctuation of the battle effect short on the peripheral control board 1510) Send a fluctuation pattern command (indicating a pattern). When the judgment result notification command and the fluctuation pattern command are received from the main control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 fluctuates and displays the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size at the lower left portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, When the variation time specified by the received variation pattern command has elapsed, all the decoration symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, if reaching (not reach, reach, and big hit) is indicated by the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command received from the main control MPU, the main character 1600a stops and The mode which noticed is displayed (FIG. 158 (B)).

  Next, the periphery control unit 1511 displays the enemy character 1600b on the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to face the main character 1600a (FIG. 158 (C)), and then the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 Black out (Figure 158 (D)). Then, it is shown that the received judgment result notification command will be a big hit (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit) to continue the high probability time-short state, and the fluctuation pattern command instructs execution of the battle production short fluctuation pattern If it is, the peripheral control unit 1511 gradually brightens the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 to make only the main character 1600a float up, and the reduced size is displayed in the lower left part of the game board side effect display device 1600 -The player is notified that a big hit will be made by stopping and displaying the middle and right decorative symbols in a big hit mode (big hit symbol) and displaying "big hit confirmed!" (FIG. 158 (E)).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 156, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The jackpot symbol of the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display at a timing during the battle effect that only the main character 1600a is lifted after blacking out the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. The main control MPU starts open control of the big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) based on the stop display and the big hit symbol of the second special symbol being stopped and displayed. In addition, when opening control of the big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) is started by the main control MPU, the area control unit 1511 displays "big hit confirmed!" In order to notify that control is started, the player can be made to recognize that control of the big hit gaming state is started, and the player is disadvantaged without noticing that control of the big hit gaming state is started. We can prevent suffering. In addition to the above-mentioned example, it is not limited to the example described above as long as the player surely recognizes that the control of the big hit gaming state is started. ), Or may be displayed to notify the start of the big hit (start big hit).

  As shown in FIG. 156, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously executes battle effects even after the control of the big hit gaming state is started by the main control MPU, and displays an aspect in which the main character 1600a attacks the enemy character 1600b. (FIG. 159F). Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays “Press the button and put a stop!” On the game board side effect display device 1600 and start the timer to start measuring the effective period (FIG. 159 (G)), and the effective period It is not possible for the player to visually recognize the back and back rotating ornament unit 3550 by the lifting and lowering unit 3510 based on the operation button 410 being operated and the detection signal from the pressing detection sensor 440 being input to the peripheral control unit 1511. From the retracted position (rising end position), it slides downward in a circular arc and is moved to the appearing position (falling end position) visible from the player side, and the rotary connecting member 3630 is rotated to make the back four corners second decoration The back four corner second decoration 3363 attached to the body base 3631 and the back four corners second decoration base 3631 is rotated (turned) (FIG. 159 (H) .

  Then, after displaying the mode in which the main character 1600a has won (FIG. 159 (I)), the periphery control unit 1511 executes the effect display (big hit effect; round effect display etc.) of the big hit gaming state as shown in FIG. Do. In this manner, even if the big hit gaming state is started before the completion of the battle production short is completed, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously executes the continuation of the battle production short according to the operation of the operation button 410. By making the back decoration unit 3550 appear, it is made to proceed in the direction in which the effects of the battle effect short are completed (FIG. 159 (H)). In other words, when the battle effect is executed, the player operates the operation button 410 to cause the back and forth back rotating ornament unit 3550 to appear in order to complete the effect of the battle effect short. As described above, since it is possible to complete the effects of the battle effect short according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player, it is possible to reflect the player's intention in the effects and obtain satisfaction and a sense of accomplishment. An attractive rendition can be executed than a gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 156, the effective period of the operation button 410 is continued until one round of the big hit gaming state is ended, but even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the effective period. After the effective period has elapsed, the back-bottom and rear-turn decorative unit 3550 may be exposed, or if the operation button 410 is not operated within the effective period, the back-end and rear-rotation decorative unit 3550 is exposed. Alternatively, the mode in which the main character 1600a has won may be displayed.

  Further, in this example, the player is notified of becoming a big hit in the middle of the battle production and control of the big hit gaming state is started, and the continuation of the battle production is executed during execution of the big hit gaming state and the production result is displayed. In addition to advancing the start timing of the big hit gaming state originally started after executing all the battle effects, and shortening the variation time of the battle effects executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, per unit time It is suppressed that the number of times of variation display of the special symbol is reduced. Specifically, in this example, a period of 58 seconds to 87 seconds (which varies depending on the operation timing of the operation button 410) is set as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect short. However, the fluctuation time corresponding to the period for executing the effect to be executed before the start of the jackpot gaming state is 12 seconds, and after the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect short is selected and the second special symbol is fluctuated, When 12 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, and control of the jackpot gaming state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect short (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but it may be half or more of the whole period) effects are executed during the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state The production period of the battle production short performed before the control is 12 seconds, while the production period of the battle production short performed during the big hit gaming state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (different according to the operation timing of the operation button 410 ).

  Thus, the period (period executed as a big hit effect) during the big hit game state of all the production periods required to execute the battle effect short is a period (variation time) executed before the start of the big hit game state By making it longer than), the time required for the variable display can be reduced, and reduction in the number of times of the variable display of the special symbol per unit time can be suppressed. As described above, in the jackpot gaming state, after opening the large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower The opening and closing pattern (round) to be closed when the game ball is detected by the upper large winning opening sensor 2552 or the lower large winning opening sensor 2354 that nine winning balls have been won in the large winning opening 2005) multiple times (4 in this example) In order to execute the game once or 16 times, a period of a certain period or more is always required from the start to the end of the jackpot gaming state. The game board side effect display is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display effect (the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol in this case) before the start of the big hit gaming state among a part of all the effects of the battle effect short. While performing the remaining effects as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state, as the effect display) to be executed by the device 1600, and also as a variable hit effect before the start of the big hit gaming state However, the fluctuation time of the battle effect short is set to be relatively shorter than the effect period of the battle effect short which is executed as the big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state. As a result, for the player, the handle 302 is operated to perform battle presentation during the execution period of the jackpot gaming state only by winning the gaming ball in the big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005). A part of the effects of the short is executed, and all the effects of the battle effect short are fluctuated while the effects of the battle effect short are made to end without being terminated halfway before the start of the big hit gaming state. Since the variation time of the battle effect short can be shortened by 46 seconds to 75 seconds as compared to when executed during the second special symbol variation display, the variation display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is started. The period from the end to the end of the jackpot gaming state can be shortened, and the number of times of display of fluctuation of the special symbol per unit time is low because the fluctuation time is shortened. Because it can be suppressed to, may increase the execution opportunities jackpot determination process. Also, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed over a long period of time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit gaming state, so the battle can be performed without simplifying the contents of the effect. The effect can be executed to reduce the fluctuation time, and a decrease in the game interest due to simplification of the effect content can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described example, an effect (a button effect) for requesting a button operation after determination that a big hit is determined is performed, and the back decoration unit is turned based on the operation button 410 being operated within the effective period. The 3550 is moved from the retreat position which can not be visually recognized from the player side to the appearance position which can be visually recognized. In other words, the player is notified in advance that the player has decided that the jackpot will be decided, and the player must know in advance that the back decoration back rotating ornament unit 3550 will appear if the operation button 410 is operated within the effective period. The button effect is being performed in Usually, the button effect is executed before the result of the variable display is determined, and when the result of the variable display is removed, the back decoration is a rotating decoration even if the operation button 410 is operated within the effective period. It is set so that the possibility of causing the unit 3550 to appear from the retracted position to the appearing position is low, and when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effective period, back turning back rotation The possibility of causing the body unit 3550 to appear from the retracted position to the appearance position is set to be high.

  In addition, as described above, since the big hit probability at low probability is set to 1 in 400, and the big hit probability at high probability is set to 1 in 40, most of the fluctuation display to be executed loses display results. Even when the button effect is executed, there is a low possibility that the back and back rotary ornament unit 3550 appears from the retracted position to the appearance position even if the operation button 410 is operated. As described above, even when the button effect is performed, even if the user operates the operation button 410, the player feels stress if the back decoration device unit 3550 does not appear from the retracted position to the appearance position, and the operation is performed. Even if the button 410 is operated, there is a low possibility that the back decoration back rotary ornament unit 3550 appears from the retracted position to the appearance position, and there is a possibility that the game entertainment will be reduced when the button effect is executed.

  In this example, when it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit as described above and the button effect is executed and the operation button 410 is operated within the effective period, the back and back back rotation decoration unit 3550 always appears from the retracted position In order to execute the button effect in a state in which the player has grasped in advance that the game is to be played, the operation button 410 is operated to release the stress accumulated by the button effect executed before it is decided that the big hit will be made. It can be done. In addition, since it is possible to operate the operation button 410 in a state where attention is paid to surrounding players by having determined to be a big hit, and the back and back turning decorative unit 3550 can be made to appear, a sense of superiority can be obtained. You can do it and you can further enhance the joy of being a big hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157 and FIG. 158 (A) to FIG. 158 (D), FIG. 158 (E '), FIG. 159, and FIG. explain. In addition, since the effect performed based on the variation pattern of the battle effect long includes the effect similar to the effect executed based on the change pattern of the battle effect short, the battle effect short for the overlapping portion Will be replaced with battle production long, and only the part different from the battle production short production will be described below.

  158 (A) to FIG. 158 (D) based on the reception of the determination result command and the fluctuation pattern command (in this case, the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long) from the main control MPU. ) Is executed, if the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 is gradually brightened to make only the enemy character 1600b float up (Fig. 158 (E ')), an attack by the enemy character 1600b is performed. . As shown in FIG. 157, the attack by the enemy character 1600b is performed while the second special symbol is variably displayed.

  The received judgment result notification command indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit in this example) continuing the high probability time short state and it is instructed to execute the variation pattern of battle production long by the variation pattern command In this case, the peripheral control unit 1511 displays a mode in which the main character 1600a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1600b (FIG. 160 (F ′)), and the reduced size is displayed in the lower left part of the game board side effect display device 1600. The player is notified that the game will be a big hit by stopping and displaying the left, middle, and right decorative symbols in a big hit form (big hit symbol) and displaying “Avoid attack! Big hit confirmed!” (FIG. 160 (G ′ )). After that, the effects shown in FIGS. 159 (F) to 159 (I) are executed. Also, as shown in FIG. 157, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display by the main control MPU is the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 The big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display at a timing in the middle of the battle production that the main character 1600a avoids the attack of the enemy character 1600b, and the big hit of the second special symbol The main control MPU starts open control of the big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) based on the stop display of the symbol.

  On the other hand, the judgment result notification command received indicates a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) which ends the high probability time short state and the execution of the fluctuation pattern of the battle production long by the fluctuation pattern command If the peripheral control unit 1511 displays a mode in which the main character 1600a receives an attack of the enemy character 1600b (FIG. 160 (F ′ ′)), the received determination result notification command is not released. For example, the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed in reduced size in the lower left part of the game board side effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed in the form of out of alignment (in this case, reach out of pattern) and the received judgment result notification command is high The game board side effect display device 16 if it is a big hit (in this example 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) which ends probability time saving state The player is to stop and display the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed in reduced size in the lower left part of 0 in the manner of a big hit and display "defeat ..." the player to end the deviation or high probability time short state (FIG. 160 (G ′ ′)). After that, if the received determination result notification command is a disconnection, the process returns to FIG. 158 (A), and the game board side effect display device 1600 displays an aspect in which the main character 1600a is moving, and the received determination result notification command is high. If it is a big hit that ends the probability time reduction state (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit), it notifies that it will start the big hit gaming state, and after executing the control of the big hit gaming state, it returns to FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 displays an aspect in which the main character 1600a is moving.

  Note that a period of 78 seconds to 107 seconds (which varies depending on the operation timing of the operation button 410) is set as a period required to execute all the effects of the battle effect long performed in the case of a big hit. However, the fluctuation time corresponding to the period for executing the effect to be executed before the start of the jackpot gaming state is 32 seconds, and after the fluctuation pattern of the battle effect long is selected and the second special symbol is fluctuated, When 32 seconds have elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the jackpot symbol, and control of the jackpot gaming state is started. And most of the effects of the battle effect long (in this example, 46 seconds to 75 seconds, but it may be half or more of the entire period) effects are executed during the big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state While the production period of battle production long executed before control is 32 seconds, the production period of battle production long executed during the big hit gaming state is 46 seconds to 75 seconds (different according to the operation timing of operation button 410 ).

  As described above, even when performing a battle effect whose production period is longer than that of the battle effect short, a period executed during the big hit gaming state among all the effect periods required to execute the battle effect long (execute as a big hit effect The time required for the fluctuation display can be reduced by making the time period) longer than the period (variation time) executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, and the number of fluctuation display times of special symbols per unit time can be reduced. Can be deterred. That is, the game board side effect display in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the fluctuation display effect (special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol in this case) before the start of the big hit gaming state among a part of all the effects of battle production long While performing the remaining effects as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state, and performing it as a big hit effect after the start of the big hit gaming state, a production period of battle effect long executed as a variable display effect before the big hit gaming state starts However, the fluctuation time of the battle production long is set so as to be relatively shorter than the production period of the battle production long executed as the big hit production after the start of the big hit gaming state. As a result, for the player, the handle 302 is operated to perform battle presentation during the execution period of the jackpot gaming state only by winning the gaming ball in the big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005). Perform a part of the production of the long, while performing all the production of the battle production long to the end without ending on the way, but also all the production of the battle production long as the fluctuation display production of the second special symbol fluctuation display The variation time of the battle production long is reduced by 46 seconds to 75 seconds as compared to when it is executed during the period until the variation display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) is started and the big hit gaming state is ended Period of time can be shortened, and it is possible to suppress reduction in the number of times of display of variation of the special symbol per unit time by shortening the variation time, so It may increase the line opportunity. Also, even if the time required for the variable display is reduced, the battle effect can be executed over a long period of time from the start of the variable display to the execution of the big hit gaming state, so the battle can be performed without simplifying the contents of the effect. The effect can be executed to reduce the fluctuation time, and a decrease in the game interest due to simplification of the effect content can be suppressed.

  In addition, it takes 65 seconds as the time required to execute all the effects of the battle production long which is executed when it becomes a big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) which ends the high probability time reduction state. It is set. In other words, the variation time of the battle effect long executed when the big hit (in this example, 4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) to end the out-of-date or high probability time-short state is set to 65 seconds. In addition, after displaying the mode that the main character 1600a receives because the battle effect long can not be avoided and the attack of the enemy character 1600b can not be avoided, the main character 1600a is resurrected to perform an effect of defeating the enemy character 1600b. In this case, when the main character 1600a is revived, the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the big hit symbol of the left, middle and right decorative symbols is stopped and displayed. Then, after the control of the jackpot gaming state is started, an effect of defeating the enemy character 1600b (for example, the effects of FIG. 159 (F) to FIG. 159 (I)) may be executed. In this case, the period of the effect to be executed before the start of the big hit gaming state may be longer than the period of the effect played during the big hit gaming state, but even in this case at least all Since the effect period can be shortened as compared with the case where the effect of is executed before the start of the big hit gaming state, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the number of times of the fluctuation display of the special symbol per unit time.

  As mentioned above, although the suitable embodiment was mentioned and described about the above-mentioned battle production, this example is not limited to these embodiments, As shown below, in the range which does not deviate from the gist of the above-mentioned embodiment, variously Improvements and design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, It applies to the pachislot machine, and the gaming machine formed by uniting a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In the above example, although what is performed during the high probability time reduction state is shown, the effect period is shortened compared to the case where all the effects performed in connection with the variable display are performed before the start of the big hit gaming state It is not limited to the high probability time short state as long as the control is performed, and the low probability short time state (so-called normal state), low probability time short state (so-called short time state), high probability non-short time state, high probability time short state It may be carried out in any one or any combination (or all) of (a so-called probability change state). In addition, when the control for shortening the effect period is executed also in cases other than the high probability time reduction state, the appearance frequency and the jackpot expectation of the effect may be made different for each gaming state. For example, in the non-time-short state (high probability non-time short state, low probability non-time short state), the appearance frequency is lower than that in the time short state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) You may increase the selection ratio of the long version (battle production long) of the battle production in the non-time-shortening state when becoming a big hit, and increase the selection ratio of the short version (battle production short) in the battle-time state In the time saving state, the effect of shortening the period from the start of the variable display of the special symbol (in this case, the second special symbol) to the end of the big hit gaming state may be enhanced.

  Further, as described above, in the fluctuation pattern that is a big hit that continues the high probability time reduction state among the battle production short and the battle production long, the button production is executed during the big hit gaming state, but according to the operation timing of the operation button 410 You may make it differ in the production content of the big hit production performed after the end of battle production. For example, when a button effect is executed, it is set as an effective period of the operation button 410 until a predetermined round (for example, three rounds) of the big hit gaming state is finished, and the operation button 410 is set at an early round (for example, until two rounds are finished). When the is operated, a series of big hit effects (such as moving images) which are finished before the remaining rounds of the big hit gaming state are executed, and the operation button 410 is operated in the late round (for example, three rounds) In this case, a series of big hit effects may be ended midway when the remaining rounds of the big hit gaming state are executed while executing the same effect. As described above, when the operation timing of the operation button 410 is late, the jackpot effect is terminated halfway, so the operation button 410 can be operated at an early timing.

  In addition, regardless of the operation timing of the operation button 410 as described above, while executing the common big hit effect, depending on the operation timing of the operation button 410, whether it is executed until the big hit effect is completed or it is ended halfway For example, different effects may be executed according to the operation timing of the operation button 410. For example, when the operation timing of the operation button 410 is early, effects such as entertaining the player are displayed. If the operation timing of the operation button 410 is late, the operation button 410 may be operated at an early timing by displaying an effect that makes the player uncomfortable. The timing when the operation button 410 is operated (Round, elapsed time, large winning opening until the operation button 410 is operated (upper large winning opening 2006 or Depending on the number of game balls entered into the big winning opening 2005) and the like, the player can consider the type to be executed as a big hit effect by changing the type of the big hit effect to be executed after the end of the battle effect. The battle effect may be completed by operating the operation button 410 at the determined timing. As described above, by making the subsequent development different in accordance with the timing at which the operation button 410 is operated, it is possible to make the player think about the timing at which the operation button 410 is operated and enjoy the game in the big hit gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to execute a more attractive presentation than the big hit presentation which is being executed in the conventional big hit gaming state.

  In addition, the aspect of the battle effect may be changed according to the operation timing of the operation button 410, for example, the operation timing of the operation button 410 (round, elapsed time, large winning prize opening (up to the operation of the operation button 410 Effect display (for example, back bottom back spin decoration unit) when making the back bottom back spin decoration unit 3550 appear as the number of game balls entered into the big winning port 2006 or the bottom big winning port 2005) is earlier or later When displaying a flame around 3550, the size and color of the flame may be flashy. As the operation timing of the operation button 410 is earlier, the operation button 410 can be operated at an earlier timing by making the effect display at the time of making the back decoration back rotary ornament unit 3550 appear brighter, and the operation timing of the operation button 410 is It is possible to operate the operation button 410 at a late timing by making the effect display when making the back and back turning decorative unit 3550 appear more flashy as it is later. Thus, by appropriately setting the effect, it is possible to guide the player to operate the operation button 410 at a predetermined timing.

  Also, depending on the number of gaming balls that have entered the large winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower large winning opening 2005) until the operation button 410 is operated as the operation timing of the operation button 410, the subsequent effects (battle effect When making the aspect of the jackpot effect different from one or both), the big winning opening (upper large winning opening 2006 or lower) in all the jackpot gaming state executed since the control of high probability time short state is started It may be made to change according to the number of game balls which entered the big winning opening 2005). In this case, it is possible to make the aspect of the effect different as the number of times of the big hit gaming state executed in the high probability time short state increases, so the player by the aspect of the effect executed according to the number of the big hit gaming state Can give a sense of superiority and satisfaction, and can further enhance the joy of being a big hit.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the button effect is executed and the operation button 410 is operated within the effective period, the effective period ends at that point and the back bottom back spin decoration unit 3550 is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example) Although it is configured to appear only once, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the back decoration back rotation decoration unit 3550 appears even if it is within the validity period without ending the validity period, back decoration rotation decoration within the validity period After the body unit 3550 is retracted, the back and back rotating decoration unit 3550 may be made to appear by operating the operation button 410 again, or a predetermined round (even in all rounds) in the jackpot gaming state In the case where the operation button 410 is operated in a specific round (for example, until the end of 10 rounds or odd rounds), the back decoration back rotation decoration unit 3 This may further enhance the joy of becoming a big hit, and the big hit due to the appearance of the back and forth rotating decorative unit 3550 by the operation of the operation button 410. You can appeal to the surroundings and give a sense of superiority.

  Further, in the above-described example, not only a big hit but also a battle effect (battle production short, battle production long) can be executed even in the case of losing, but it becomes a big hit during high probability time reduction state The variation pattern of the battle effect may be executed only in the case, and the battle effect may not be executed when it becomes a loss. By configuring in this way, when a battle effect is executed, it always becomes a big hit, so it is possible to pay attention to the effect with a margin and at the same time as the control of the big hit gaming state is started Big hit, 4R latent probability big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 16R positive variation big hit) can be made to pay attention.

  In addition, while the big hit (4R normal big hit, 4R latent probability big hit) which ends high probability time short state with the decision result notification command while high probability time short state is indicated, battle production (battle production short, battle production) When a change pattern of "long" is instructed, the control of the big hit gaming state is started after the end of the battle effect, but in the 4R big hit gaming state executed in this case, compared to the 16 R big hit gaming state Since the period required from the start to the end of the jackpot gaming state is short, even if it is executed during the variable display of the second special symbol as a variable display effect until the end of the battle production special symbol (this In this case, the special symbol (in this case, compared to the period from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol) to the end of the 16 big hit gaming state It can shorten the period until the end of the 4 jackpot gaming state from the start of variable display of the second special symbol).

[6. Game content]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3, so that the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 , The space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 is driven into the upper part in the game area 5a, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows either the left side or the right side of the center character 2500 depending on the driving strength. In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be hit more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls in one minute continuously, that is, , The game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are implanted in the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge array at an appropriate position, and the game balls are obstacle nails. By the contact, the flow-down speed of the gaming ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the gaming ball, and the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) rotated by the contact of the game ball is provided at a suitable position.

  The gaming ball driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 contacts a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) when entering the left side in a front view than the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, The region to the left of the center character 2500 will flow down. Then, when the gaming ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center character 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2523.

  The game balls supplied to the stage 2530 roll on the stage 2530 and move back and forth and are discharged forward. When the gaming ball is released into the gaming area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, since it is positioned immediately above the first starting opening 2002, it is accepted by the first starting opening 2002 with high probability. When a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from outside the center into the gaming area 5a, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The gaming balls released from the stage 2530 of the center role 2500 into the gaming area 5a may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100 or the lower winning opening 2005 etc. in the open state.

  By the way, when the gaming ball which has flowed down to the left side of the center character 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 of the lower side unit 2200 or the first There is a possibility that it can be accepted by the starting opening 2002 and the like. Then, when the game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control substrate 1310 and the payout control substrate 951. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (is hit), the downstream thereof On the side, it flows down the area provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004.

  Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate section 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result is “normal hit”, the second starting opening 2004 is for a predetermined time ( For example, during 0.3 to 10 seconds, the game machine is opened and the game ball can be received in the second start port 2004. Then, when a game ball is received in the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Ru.

  In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 normally opens after the fluctuation time has elapsed.

  In addition, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the normal lottery result can not be started, so the normal lottery The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous regular lottery result is finished. In addition, the number of reserved normal lottery results has an upper limit of up to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being suspended. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", " A drawing of a special drawing result is generated which generates a middle hit, a small hit, a probability change, a time reduction, and the like. Then, the selected special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, in the special lottery result that is drawn by the game ball being received in the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, “lost”, “small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “5 There are 15R big hit, "per probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction) per hit", "probability change time per shot", "probability change time for short loss", etc.

  In the case of the special lottery result that the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 causes the advantageous gaming state After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 becomes ready to receive the game ball with a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received at lower large winning hole 2005 or upper large winning hole 2006 when lower lower winning hole 2005 or upper large winning hole 2006 is in the open state, a predetermined number of payout keys are taken from main payout board 1310 and the payout board For example, ten or thirteen game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321. Therefore, when the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 is capable of receiving the game ball, by letting the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 receive the game ball, many gaming balls are paid out. And can entertain the player.

  If the special lottery result is "small hit", the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 can receive the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) The opening and closing pattern to be closed after being opened is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 becomes open to accept the game ball, or An open / close pattern that puts the gaming ball in an unacceptable closed state if any of the conditions for receiving a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls to the lower large winning opening 2005 or the upper large winning opening 2006 is satisfied One opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R big hit" is repeated for two rounds, "5R big hit" for 5 rounds, and "15R big hit" for 15 rounds to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, change the probability that "special hit" such as "big hit" will be drawn ("perhaps") or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result There is a hit that you do ("time hit").

  In this embodiment, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2002 are until the special drawing result drawn from the start of the special drawing is suggested by the reception of the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. Since the suggestion of the special lottery result can not be started when the game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed. Ru. The number of pending special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, and for more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being put on hold. Thereby, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by the accumulation of the suspension.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 causes the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time by repeatedly turning on and off, and thereafter suggests the special lottery result by a combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is such that each symbol row is fluctuated and fluctuated in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbol rows in the symbol row are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols of the three symbol rows displayed in a stopped state become a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "loss", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) corresponding to the drawing result of the special drawing is generated.

  In addition, the time which suggests the special lottery result in function display unit 1400 (flashing time of LED (variation time)), and the time which suggests the special lottery result in game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol row fluctuates, The time until the finalized image is displayed is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  In addition, on peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by gaming board side effect display device 1600, effect operation unit 400 in door frame 3 according to the selected special lottery result. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decoration bodies of center character 2500, various decoration bodies of back unit 3000, back bottom back movable effect unit 3100, back top left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back-up middle movable effect unit 3400, the back-down front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming ball can be stored below and in front of the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the game ball is received by the general winning opening 2001 etc. The lower bowl ball supply port 323c and the lower bowl ball outlet in the lower plate 322 are provided by the presentation operation unit 400 (second presentation operation unit 400A) provided with the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 and disposed at the center in the horizontal direction Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the holes 322a is difficult to see from the front (player) (it is difficult to see), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, and the player The pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal and can attract strong interest. In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball going from the lower ball supply opening 323c to the lower ball removal hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game in the lower plate 322 It is possible to make it difficult to notice the flow of balls and prevent distraction, and it is possible to suppress a drop in interest for the game.

  Further, the bottom plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate in the bottom plate 322 for guiding the gaming ball from the bottom plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) It is assumed that the lower countersink hole 322a is kept open since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball being guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d and the part between the ball opening 322a and the like. The gaming ball supplied from the lower ball supply opening 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower ball removal hole 322a, and the player can receive the game ball. An illusion can be made that the game balls are discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the inconvenience of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to allow the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since half or more of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removing hole 322a, and the like are difficult to visually recognize from the front by the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) The lower counter ball supply port 323c, the lower counter ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower tray 322 is made to turn to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A), the actual lower tray is smaller than the size of the lower tray 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 as compared to the appearance.

  Further, in the state where the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a is open, the gaming ball released from the lower disc ball supply port 323c into the lower board 322 can be Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower countersink hole 322a by the guide means such as the portion between the hole 322a and the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d and discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322. The game balls can be prevented from circulating around the lower plate 322, and the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 can be reliably made difficult to visually identify from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

  Furthermore, when the lower tray discharge port is kept open, the gaming medium supplied to the lower tray from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is immediately lowered from the lower tray discharge port without causing the player to notice the player by the guiding means. Since it is possible to discharge the game medium to the player, it is possible to let the illusion that the game medium is discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate without passing through the lower plate. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the inconvenience of the game medium passing through the lower tray, and to allow the player to concentrate on the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front half or more of the storage area (storage area) of the gaming ball in plan view of the lower tray 322. The actual size of the lower tray 322 is more than twice the size of the visible one with respect to the size of 322. Therefore, as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of gaming balls.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward in the front view below the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 in which the game ball is received by the general winning opening 2001 etc. Stage operation unit attachment for mounting a large stage operation unit 400 (second stage operation unit 400A) having the same height as the entire height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 While having a portion 326a, it is concaved so as to turn to the rear lower the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the approximate center in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 Because it has a shape, the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A attached to the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, since the large scale rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) appears to be emphasized at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate are vertically aligned in the conventional pachinko machine, the player can see At first glance, it can be recognized that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can have high appeal. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the lower front decoration portion 326c recessed rearward on the left and right outside of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the game is moved to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A), and a sufficient storage amount (volume of the lower plate 322) of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 can be secured. It is not necessary to play while paying attention to the lower plate 322 being full with the game balls, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game, to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 is wound to the rear of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall 322 (the front of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. In this way, it is possible to make it possible for the player to recognize that the storage amount of gaming balls is sufficiently secured even by touch, and in the state where gaming balls are stored in the lower tray 322, the inside of the lower tray 322 Since it is possible to recognize that many game balls are stored, it is possible to give a player a sense of satisfaction, and to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. In addition, since the finger of the hand put in the lower plate 322 is hard to touch the back wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., it gives the player the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine can be prevented from giving a sense of incongruity, and the player can be relieved and a decrease in interest for the game can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed to be wider toward the back side (backward), the storage amount of the game balls can be sufficiently secured even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is less noticeable on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate front lower decoration portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is opened. Thus, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) can be made relatively conspicuous. Therefore, it is possible to provide the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the gaming balls in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to enhance the appeal of the player and It can be entertained to suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, the player covers the lower plate 322 because the lower plate cover 340 covers the side and the upper part of the part of the lower plate 322 which is located behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A). When putting a hand, it is possible to prevent a finger tip or the like from touching the inner surface of the dish unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) etc. It can be played in a safe state. In addition, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from intruding (spinning) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) is disposed at the center of the front of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) The pachinko machine 1 can have a high appeal that can be made more noticeable and can strongly attract the player's attention, and the decoration by the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) can be easily viewed. Then, it is possible to enjoy the decoration and the effect of the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

  In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball supply port 323c capable of communicating with the upper plate 321, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating up and down in an openable and closable manner, the conventional pachinko machine The player is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine because it has the same function as the lower tray at the time of playing with this pachinko machine 1 and is not confused about the function of the lower plate 322, as in the conventional It is possible to play the game with a feeling like this, and allow the player to concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball extraction hole 322a are respectively disposed behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the lower disc ball supply port 323c and the lower disc ball supply port 323c are viewed from the front. The lower disc ball removal hole 322a can be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be clarified to improve the appearance, and a pachinko with high appeal that can strongly attract the player's interest It can be machine 1.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5 a in the door frame 3, the plate unit 320 bulges forward. In the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326, the door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player While attaching the in-operation button inner decoration member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) decorating the outer side, the outer diameter so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) Is about 15 cm and the center bulges outward (outward) from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450). The operation button 410 having the transparent button lens 411 is attached, and the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. Since the cylindrical button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration in the operation button are made by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, etc. Reduces the visibility of the outer edge and back side (rear side) of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) etc. from the gap between the member 432 (screen unit 470) And the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the decoration member 432 in the operation button provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the in-operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Since the outer edge and back side of the in-operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see, the button lens 411 and the in-operation button decoration member 432 (screen unit can be enlarged by enlarging the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between them and 470) is relatively large, it can be well concealed by the first button decoration part 411a etc., so it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the appearance and at the same time, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous, and the player's interest is strong. A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be drawn.

  Furthermore, since the button base 413 (body part 413a) cylindrically protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the decoration member 432 in the operation button When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide anything outside the operation member inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) bulging in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 A plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are arranged), that is, the advancing and retreating direction of the operation button 410 The light is likely to be refracted when viewed from the player side, since the light is inclined with respect to the plane orthogonal to Therefore, the first button decoration 411a, the second button decoration 411b, and the button frame 412 and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470 Can make it difficult to see the outer edge and back side of the in-operation button decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between them, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape which bulges outward, the volume in the operation button 410 is increased. It becomes possible to make the side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) larger and easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device in which the player can be enjoyed by the operation button 410 It is possible to facilitate the provision of the 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player.

  Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, designability (decorability) is given to the operation button 410. Therefore, the operation button 410 in the present pachinko machine 1 is made conspicuous to interest the player. This makes it easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play a game.

  Further, in the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque. It is possible to reliably hide that the back side of the operation button 410 or the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470) can be seen from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation member in the operation button 432 (screen unit 470). Deterioration in appearance of the button 410 or the like can be reduced to improve the appearance.

  In addition, the button lens 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 extending inward from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 and having a predetermined width, and in cooperation with the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Since it is possible to make the gap between the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the in-operation button decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 less visible from the side, the main portion 413a and the in-operation button decorative member 432 ( The space between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. Can be moved well.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 has a cylindrical shape, directionality is lost in the outer periphery as compared with the case where it has a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 can be surely enjoyed for the player, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, the player participation type effect for causing the player to operate the operation button 410 can be easily performed without confirming the position of the operation button 410 without performing the operation. Since it is easy to touch the operation button 410 and press the button, it is easy for the player to participate in the player participation type effect using the operation button 410, thereby making the player entertain and lowering interest. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, an effect image of the player is operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. The door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410 can be strongly attracted, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) The effect can be enjoyed and the player can be urged to operate the operation button 410 by the effect image or the light emission effect by the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) A drop in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player participation type effect and have fun. In addition, by the effect being executed in the operation button 410, it can be made to think that there is something good depending on the player, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest Can.

  In addition, it is possible to visually recognize the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) through the transparent button lens 411 (a part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be made to immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and the player has a high appeal for the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 can be enhanced in the expectation for the effect It is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest.

[Display of pending storage in game board side effect display device 1600]
In addition, as shown in FIG. 162A, the first hold number display area 1510 related to the first special symbol is displayed on the lower left side of the game board side effect display device 1600 visible to the player. Of the second hold number display area 1580 (related to the second start port 2004) related to the second special symbol is set on the lower right side of the display panel.

  In FIG. 162 (A), in the first hold number display area 1510, two hold images 1521, 1522 representing that the first special symbol is held corresponding to the hold number of the lottery result are displayed. It is shown that the first hold number of the lottery result is "2" for the special symbol. Further, in the second hold number display area 1580, a hold image indicating that the second special symbol is held corresponding to the second hold number of the lottery result is not displayed, and the second special symbol is drawn for the second special symbol It is shown that there is no pending number of results.

  In addition, the display of the 1st number of reservations in the 1st number of reservations display area 1510 about the 1st special symbol is the 1st reservation storage, the 2nd reservation storage, the 3rd reservation storage toward the center from the left The hold images 1521-1524 are displayed as in the fourth hold storage. In addition, the display of the number of holdings in the second number of holdings display area 1580 of the second number of holdings for the second special symbol is the first holding memory, the second holding memory, the third from the center toward the right The pending image is displayed as in the pending storage, the fourth pending storage.

  In addition, in the present example, the hold images 1521-1524 indicating that the images are held and stored can have a plurality of types of display modes. For example, it takes a plurality of display modes such as an image having the same shape but different display colors, an image having the same display color but different shapes, and an embodiment in which both the shape and the display color of the image are different. obtain.

  In the present embodiment, the hold images 1521-1524 representing that the first special symbol is held and stored is displayed in a circular shape, and the display color of the hold images 1521-1524 changes to a plurality of colors. It is supposed to be.

  In FIG. 162 (A), the hold image 1521 and the hold image 1522 for the first hold storage and the second hold storage for the first special symbol are displayed in the normal display mode of the hold storage, for example, in a circular shape. It is displayed in “blue” (first reserved image) and is visible to the player.

  Next, in FIG. 162 (B), the middle decoration pattern 1600b in change is stopped and displayed at the symbol “5”, and as a result, the left decoration pattern is “7” and the middle decoration pattern is the “5” and the right decoration The stop display is made with the symbol “7”, and it is shown that the player is notified that the variation stop result of the decorative symbol is “reach out”.

  Next, FIG. 162 (C) shows that the symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started on the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600. Hereinafter, this is referred to as retention memory retention.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 by command analysis processing, and accordingly, the left decoration on the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600 The pattern variation of the pattern 1600a, the middle decoration pattern 1600b and the right decoration pattern 1600c is started.

  Then, after that, it is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601) that the peripheral control unit 1511 has received the first number-of-holds designation command "1" transmitted from the main control board 1310. Accordingly, the first holding storage is digested for the first special symbol, and the holding image 1521 displayed as the first holding memory disappears, and the second holding for the first special symbol in FIG. 165 (A) The hold image 1522, which has been displayed as a memory, becomes a new first hold memory and is moved and displayed as a hold image 1521 (circular and display color "blue"), and the first hold of the lottery result for the first special symbol The number becomes "1".

[Hold change production]
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display in the game board side effect display device 1600. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 163 (A), it is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601) that the first hold number designation command “2” transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received while the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c are changing. Furthermore, the fact that the first hold count designation command “3” transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received after that is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601).

  In response to this, on the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600 in FIG. 163 (A), the first special symbol is newly added to the right of the hold image 1521 displayed as the first hold storage. And the hold image 1522 (circular and display color "blue") is displayed, and the third hold memory is newly added on the right side of the hold image 1522 displayed as the second hold memory. The hold image 1523 (circular and display color "blue") is displayed, and it is shown that the first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol has become "3".

  Next, in FIG. 163 (B), during the variation of the decorative symbols 1600a to 1600c, the fact that the first hold number designation command "4" transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received is a command analysis process (step S601). According to this, the first special symbol is additionally displayed on the right of the hold image 1523 which has been displayed as the third hold storage, with the fourth hold memory newly displayed as the hold image 1524 (displayed in a circular shape The color "blue" is displayed, the number of first holdings of the lottery result for the first special symbol is "4", and it is indicated that the number of holding memories for the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. In the following description, the first hold count display area 1510 is simply referred to as the hold count display area 1510.

[On-hold change effect using operation button 410 and on-hold image representing on-hold storage]
In the gaming machine in which the conventional reserved announcement effect is performed, in the normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a big hit is suppressed low, and the probability of becoming a reach is not so high. Therefore, the player has a low chance of seeing the on-hold notice effect. In other words, there was a low probability of holding announcement effect.

  Furthermore, there is also a system in which a holding notice is given on condition that the operation button 410 is operated. Hereinafter, since the effect content changes when the player operates such an effect form, it is referred to as “participatory effect”. However, since there is a low probability that holding notice effect is performed, depending on the player, there is not an opportunity to be able to operate the operating button provided for the purpose for effect effectively, and dissatisfaction, lowering interest in the game There was a risk of

  Therefore, the embodiment described below relates to the invention relating to a gaming machine which can suppress the decline in the interest of the game by extending the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect.

  In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 in charge of effect control may set the first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol to a predetermined number (for example, “4”, which is the upper limit, or less). On the condition that the number has reached "3" or "2", for example, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform the hold change effect. That is, in this example, on the condition that the reception of the first hold number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board 1310 is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601), the hold change effect (hold notice is given It is made to perform a lottery (referred to as a lottery for holding change effect) whether or not to perform the effect.

  When it is determined that the hold change effect is to be performed in the hold change effect drawing, the operation of the operation button 410 by the player is validated, and whenever the operation of the operation button 410 is detected by the press detection sensor 440, A hold change effect of changing the display color of the hold image representing the hold storage is performed.

[Screen for holding change effect]
Further, in the on-hold change effect of this example, the display color (referred to as the on-the-fly display color) of the on-hold image to be finally displayed is determined based on the timing of the start winning. FIG. 163 (C) shows an example of the hold change effect screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when it is determined that the hold change effect is to be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (C), the left, middle and right decorative symbols are reduced in the upper right portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 to execute variable display. Furthermore, the character "The color of the hold changes when the button is pressed!" Is displayed in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600, suggesting that the operation to the operation button 410 is effective, and It is shown that the person is urged to operate the button.

  Note that although it is possible to arbitrarily set how long the valid period for validating the operation of the operation button described above is set, as an example, the next control command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is received. It can be until it is analyzed by command analysis processing (step S601).

  The control command may be, for example, any one of a stop display command, a big hit start command, a judgment result notification command, a first hold count specification command, or a combination selected from a plurality of these control commands. Can. In this example, in order to make the description easy to understand, it is assumed that the next stop display command transmitted from the main control board 1310 is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601).

  FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display in the game board side effect display device 1600 performed subsequent to FIG. 163 (C). In FIG. 164 (A), as a result of the player performing the operation (first time) on the operation button 410 according to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, in FIG. It is shown that the display color of the reserved image 1524 (circular shape and display color "blue") displayed in the normal display mode has changed to "green".

  Although not clearly shown in FIG. 163 (C) and FIG. 164, during the on-hold change effect, the display color of the on-hold image of on-hold storage targeted for the button operation by the player changes each time. The final display color of the hold image of the hold storage is predetermined when it is decided to perform the hold change presentation. In the specific example shown in the figure, it is assumed that the final display color of the hold image of the target hold storage is determined to be “red”. Then, the display color of the hold image of the target hold storage is displayed in the hold number display area 1510 in the final display color determined as a result.

  In FIG. 164 (A), the letters “The color of the hold will change when the button is pressed!” Are displayed in the approximate center of the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is suggested that the operation to the button is effective and that the player is urged to perform the button operation.

  Next, as a result of the player performing an operation (second time) on the operation button 410 in response to the suggestion of the button operation to the player in FIG. 164 (B), the fourth in FIG. 164 (A). It is shown that the display color of the reserve image 1524 displayed in the reserve image 1524 (circular and display color "green") has been changed to "yellow" as the reserve storage of.

  Here, among the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, the left decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol "3", and the middle and right The decorative pattern of is continuing to change display.

  In FIG. 164 (B), the letters “The color of the hold changes when the button is pressed!” Are displayed in the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600 continuously, and the operation to the operation button 410 is performed. Is suggested to be effective and to prompt the player to operate the button.

  Next, in FIG. 164 (C), as a result of the player performing the operation (third time) on the operation button 410 according to the suggestion of the button operation to the player, the fourth in FIG. 164 (B). It is shown that the display color of the reserve image 1524 displayed in the reserve image 1524 (circular and display color "yellow") has been changed to "rainbow" as the reserve storage of.

  Here, among the left, middle and right decorative symbols displayed in a reduced size in the upper right part of the game board side effect display device 1600, the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol "3", and the inside decoration is displayed. Only the decorative pattern in the pattern continues to change. In addition, it is shown that the reach has occurred by the stop design “3” of the left and right decorative design.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of a hold change effect using the hold number display in the game board side effect display device 1600 performed subsequently to FIG. 164 (C). In FIG. 165 (A), the middle decorative symbol 1600b in change is a symbol “in response to specification of the stop display command received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control unit 1511 in the command analysis processing in step S601. 4 and the reduced display of the left, middle and right decorative symbols in the upper right part of the game board side effect display device 1600 is canceled, and the original position and size of the center in the game board side effect display device 1600 Is displayed on the back, and as a result, the left decorative symbol is "3", the middle decorative symbol is "4" and the right decorative symbol is "3", and the decorative symbol variation stop result is "reach out" Indicates that the player has been notified.

  Also, in FIG. 165 (A), in response to the stop display command being specified in the command analysis process of step S601, from the display mode of the game board side effect display device 1600, "When the button is pressed The word “changes!” Has disappeared and it is suggested that the operation to the operation button 410 is not effective (the effective period to make the operation to the upper dish effect button 257 has ended). It is shown.

  As described above, the pending change presentation is performed on condition that the pending number instructed by the control command (first pending number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance. It has become. Therefore, the player is widely given the opportunity to perform the hold change presentation. After that, during execution of the pending change presentation, each time the operation button 410 is operated, the pending storage (the fourth pending storage in this example) to be displayed in the pending number display area 1510 is suspended. The display color of the image 1524 changes. Therefore, during the on-hold change effect, an opportunity for the player to operate the operation button 410 is given not only once but a plurality of times. In addition, each time the operation button 410 is operated, the display color of the hold image of the target hold storage changes each time. Therefore, since the opportunity which can participate in a holding production participating type | mold effect is expanded, the fall of game interest can be suppressed.

[Relationship between retention memory digestion and retention image]
FIGS. 165 (B) to (C) show the state in which pending memory is being digested. First, FIG. 165 (B) shows that two holding memories are digested after there are four holding memories in FIG. 165 (A).

  The peripheral control unit 1511 identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 in the command analysis process of step S601, and accordingly, the left decoration in the game board side effect display device 1600 The pattern variation of the pattern 1600a, the middle decoration pattern 1600b and the right decoration pattern 1600c is started.

  Then, after that, it is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601) that the peripheral control unit 1511 has received the first hold number designation command "3" transmitted from the main control board 1310. Accordingly, the first holding memory is digested for the first special symbol, and the holding image 1521 displayed as the first holding memory disappears, and the second special to the first special symbol in FIG. 165 (A). The hold images 1522 (display color "blue"), 1523 (display color "blue"), and 1524 display color "rainbow" displayed as the second hold memory become the first to third new hold memories. The first image is moved and displayed as a reserve image 1521 (circular shape display color "blue"), a reserve image 1522 (circle shape display color "blue"), and a reserve image 1523 (circular shape display color "rainbow") The first pending the number of lottery results for the pattern is "3".

  Next, in accordance with the specification of the stop display command received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control unit 1511 in the command analysis processing in step S601, the middle decorative pattern 1600b in change is a symbol “abbreviated, however, removed It is stopped and displayed with “pattern”. As a result, the player is informed that the left decoration pattern, the inside decoration pattern and the right decoration pattern are stopped and displayed in combination with the off pattern, and the fluctuation stop result of the decoration pattern is “off”. I will

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 in the command analysis process of step S601, and accordingly, the game board side effect display device 1600 The symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, after that, it is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601) that the peripheral control unit 1511 has received the first hold count designation command "2" transmitted from the main control board 1310. Accordingly, the first holding memory is digested for the first special symbol, and the holding image 1521 (display color "blue") displayed as the first holding memory disappears, and the first in FIG. 165 (A) The 1523 (display color "blue") and 1524 (display color "rainbow") displayed as the second to third hold memories for the special symbol become the new first and second hold memories and the hold image 1521 (circle and display color "blue"), reserve image 1522 (circle and display color "rainbow") are moved and displayed, and the first reserve number of the lottery result for the first special symbol becomes "2". FIG. 165 (B) shows the result of the above-mentioned progress process.

  Thereafter, in accordance with the fact that the stop display command received from the main control board 1310 has been specified by the command analysis processing in step S601 by the peripheral control M unit 1511, the middle decorative symbol 1600b in change is a symbol "omitted, but "Stop symbol", "Stop symbol", and as a result, the left decorative symbol, the center decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in combination with the dislocated symbol, and the player is notified that the variation stop result of the decorative symbol is "displaced". It shall be notified.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 identifies the determination result notification command and the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 in the command analysis process of step S601, and accordingly, the game board side effect display device 1600 The symbol variation of the left decorative symbol 1600a, the middle decorative symbol 1600b and the right decorative symbol 1600c is started.

  Then, after that, it is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601) that the peripheral control unit 1511 has received the first number-of-holds designation command "1" transmitted from the main control board 1310. Accordingly, the first holding memory is digested for the first special symbol, and the holding image 1521 (display color "blue") displayed as the first holding memory disappears, and the first in FIG. 165 (B) The 15223 (display color "rainbow") displayed as the second hold storage for the special symbol becomes the new first hold storage in FIG. 165 (C) and the hold image 1521 (circle-shaped display color "red" The first hold number of the lottery result for the first special symbol is "1".

  As described above, in this example, the display color of the hold image of the hold storage to be targeted is changed to “rainbow” in the above example by the operation of the player to the operation button 410 during the hold change effect. The final display color of the reserve image of the reserve storage which has become reserve storage is determined in advance when it is decided to perform the reserve change presentation.

  The effects developed on the game board side effect display device 1600 are closely related to the reach fluctuation state and the big hit notification state of the lottery symbol displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the game People's interest and attention is very high.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect is finished, in other words, even after the effective period of the operation button 410 is finished, the first hold number display area 1510 is accompanied by the termination of the hold storage. The display color of the holding image (the holding image in which the display color is changed) for which the display position is sequentially moved toward the holding storage is maintained without being changed. Therefore, it is considered that the interest of the game is not reduced without any adverse effect being felt by the effect information provided from the game board side effect display device 1600 when the player advances the game. There is.

In the specific example shown in the figure, when the hold image of the target hold storage is displayed as the first hold storage in the number-of-holds display area 1510, it is changed to the final display color "red" determined in advance. The pending image of the pending storage that has been targeted is displayed. For this reason, surprises and surprises are given to the player who intends to change the color of the reserved image by operating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player's game.

  FIG. 166 is a time chart schematically showing the pending change effect of this example, the change in the display color of the pending image to be targeted, and the display color of the pending image whose display position is to be changed as the pending storage is digested It is a chart.

  As shown in FIG. 166, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display by the main control MPU, and the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 It almost matches. In addition, the value of the first special hold number counter of the main control MPU is updated to "4" due to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 2002 while the first special symbol fluctuates, and the main control The first hold number specification command “4” is output from the board.

  Whether the peripheral control unit 1511 performs holding change effect on condition that the reception of the first holding number designation command “4” transmitted from the main control board 1310 is analyzed in the command analysis process (step S601) As a result of performing the lottery of the pending change presentation whether or not, it is decided to perform the pending change presentation by the lottery of the pending change presentation, and in this example, the fourth pending storage is the pending storage of the presentation object, the player The operation (to be referred to as a button operation) to the upper dish effect button 257 by the above is effective. In addition, a reserved image 1524 of a normal display color (circular and display color "blue"), which is described as "blue 4" in the figure, is displayed as the fourth reserved memory determined to be a notice target There is.

  Further, in the hold change effect of this example, the display color (referred to as the final display color) of the hold image to be finally displayed is determined based on the timing of the start winning, and as an example, It is assumed that the final display color of the hold image is determined to be "red".

  In FIG. 166, as a result of the player performing the first button operation during symbol variation, the display of the hold image 1524 as the fourth hold storage determined to be the effect object, described as “green 4”. The color has changed to "green". After this, as a result of the second button operation performed by the player, the display color of the hold image 1524 as the fourth hold storage determined to be the effect object described as “yellow 4” is “yellow”. It is changing. Furthermore, as a result of the third button operation being performed by the player after this, the display color of the hold image 1524 as the fourth hold memory determined to be the effect object described as "rainbow 4" is "rainbow" Has changed.

  After that, the main control board 1310 outputs a stop display command based on the stop of the fluctuation of the first special symbol. In response to the stop display command being specified in the command analysis process in step S601, the peripheral control unit 1511 stops the variation of the decorative symbol on the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, it is also shown that the button operation is not effective (the effective period for making the operation on the operation button 410 effective has ended).

  After this, with the main control MPU digesting the number of reservations of the first special symbol, the variation display of the decoration symbol is performed, and in FIG. 166, each variation of the first special symbol and the decoration symbol of the first special symbol display The display has been made three times. The first hold count specification command 3 (hereinafter simply referred to as the hold count specification command 3) is output along with the first storage of the hold storage, and accordingly, the display position of the hold image in the hold count display area 1510 Is shifted, and the hold image 1524 as the fourth hold memory determined to be the effect target is shifted to the hold image as the third hold memory described as “rainbow 3” without changing the display color. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, along with the second storage of the reserve memory, the first reserve number specification command 2 (hereinafter simply referred to as reserve number specification command 2) is output, and accordingly, the reserve image in the reserve number display area 1510 The display position is shifted, and the hold image 1524 as the third hold storage determined to be the production object is the second hold storage image described as “rainbow 2” without changing the display color. It is displayed shifted.

  Furthermore, along with the third saving of the pending storage, the first pending number specification command 1 (hereinafter simply referred to as the pending number specification command 1) is output, and accordingly, the pending image is displayed in the pending number display area 1510 The display position is shifted, and the hold image 1524 as the third hold storage determined to be the effect target changes the determined final display color as the first hold storage described as “red 1”. It is displayed being shifted to the hold image of.

[Each process related to suspension storage notice by peripheral control unit 1511]
FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing each process executed by the periphery control unit 1511 in connection with the pending storage as each process of the effect control process of step S602 in FIG. In the effect control process, the peripheral control unit 1511 sequentially executes the hold number specification command process (step A100), the hold change effect determination process (step A200), the hold change effect process (step A300), and the hold image shift process (step A400). Run. Substantive execution conditions in each process are as described below.

  If it is specified that the command analyzed in step S601 in the 16 ms steady process shown in FIG. 155 is the first pending number specification command (hereinafter, simply referred to as the pending number specification command), the step In the effect control process of S602, the number-of-holds specification command process of step A100 is executed.

  When it is determined that the number of pending storages has reached a predetermined number (for example, "4" in this example) as an execution condition of the pending change effect for changing the pending image in the pending number specifying command process of step A100. In step A200, the hold change presentation determination process of step A200 is substantially executed.

  When the hold change presentation determination process of step A200 is substantially performed and it is determined that the hold change presentation is performed, the hold change presentation process of step A300 is substantially performed. In step A100, it is detected that the number of holdings is decreased by one, and when it is determined that the display position of the holding image needs to be shifted, the holding image shift processing is substantially executed.

[Pending number specification command processing]
The number-of-holds specification command process is executed when it is specified that the command analyzed in the command analysis of step S601 is the number-of-holds specification commands. It is transmitted from the main control board 1310. The hold count specification command is a control command that is output when the hold count (memory count) managed in the main control board 1310 changes, and is a command for specifying the hold count,
Pending number specification command "0", which specifies the number of pending "0 (none)"
Hold count specification command “1” to specify the hold count “1”
Hold count specification command "2" to specify the hold count "2"
Hold count specification command "3" to specify the hold count "3"
Pending number specification command "4" to specify the number of pending "4" (upper limit),
There are five types of

  FIGS. 168 to 169 are flowcharts showing subroutines of pending number designation command processing executed by the peripheral control unit 1511. When the peripheral control unit 1511 starts processing for the number of holdings specification command, first, the number of holdings specified by the number of holdings specification command analyzed in the command analysis of step S601 is “0” (hereinafter simply referred to as the number of holdings specified (Step A110).

  If the peripheral control unit 1511 determines in step A110 that the designated holding number is “0”, the peripheral control unit 1511 sets the value 0 to the first holding number counter for storing the holding number (step A111) Clear the first to fourth of the hold image storage area set in the built-in RAM (not shown) (step A112), exit the subroutine for the number-of-holds designation command processing, and return to the effect control processing routine.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing each table, storage area, and processing operation necessary for the peripheral control unit 1511 to be involved in the pending storage and to execute each process. As shown in FIG. 173 (D), the first hold number counter to the first hold image storage area to the fourth hold image storage area are provided in the built-in RAM in correspondence with the values 1 to 4 in the first hold number counter. .

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control unit 1511 determines in step A110 that the designated number of reservations is not "0", the process proceeds to step A113, and whether or not the designated number of reservations is "4". It is determined (whether or not a predetermined number determined in advance has been reached) (step A113). In this example, on the condition that the value of the number of holdings has reached a predetermined number, it is determined to perform holding change presentation by the holding image. Although the predetermined number is described as, for example, “4” in this example, the present invention is not limited to this. The predetermined number may be a smaller number such as "3" or "2".

  If the peripheral control unit 1511 determines in step A113 that the designated number of reservations is “4”, the peripheral control unit 1511 sets the value 4 to the first number of reservations counter for storing the number of reservations (step A114) A reserve image (circular shape) is set to the fourth position of the reserve image storage area (step A115), and the display color of the reserve image is set to normal ("blue" in this example) (step A116). The execution flag of the pending change effect determination process is set (step A117), the process exits the subroutine for the pending number specifying command process and returns to the routine of the effect control process.

  On the other hand, if the periphery control unit 1511 determines in step A113 that the designated number of reservations is not "4", the process proceeds to step A113. In this case, the designated number of reservations is one of “1”, “2” and “3”. In step A114, the peripheral control unit 1511 compares the designated holding number with the value of the first holding number counter (step A120).

  Then, it is determined whether the compared result is an increase of “+1” (step A121). When it is determined that the comparison result is “+1” increase, for example, when the designated number of pending is “3” and the value of the first pending number counter is 2, etc., for storing the pending number A value is added to the first holding number counter by 1 (step A122), and a holding image (circular shape) is set in the holding image storage area (see FIG. 173 (D)) corresponding to the value of the first holding number counter (step A123) And the display color of the reserve image is set to normal ("blue" in this example) (step A124), the subroutine for the number-of-holds specification command process is exited, and the process returns to the effect control process routine.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A121 that the compared result is not “+1” increase, for example, if the designated number of pending is “3” and the value of the first pending number counter is 4, or For example, when the designated number of reservations is “2” and the value of the first number of reservations counter is 3, the comparison result is “−1”.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 determines step A121 to be NO, and decrements the value of the first hold number counter for storing the hold number by 1 (step A126), and a shift flag for executing hold image shift processing described later. Is set to 1 (execution) (step A127), the process exits the subroutine for the number-of-holds specification command processing and returns to the routine for effect control processing.

[Hold change production decision processing]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of pending change effect determination processing executed by the peripheral control unit 1511. When the suspension control effect determination process is started, the peripheral control unit 1511 first determines whether the execution flag is set (step A130). The execution flag is set in step A117 of the processing for the number-of-holds described above.

  If it is determined in step A130 that the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if it is determined that step A130 is NO, the subroutine of the suspension change effect determination processing without performing the substantial processing. To return to the effect control processing routine.

  If it is determined in step A130 that the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the execution flag is set, that is, if it is determined that step A130 is YES, random numbers for holding change effect (for example, 0 to 99) are acquired ( Step A131) Referring to the value of the hold change presentation random number and the hold change presentation determination table (step A132), it is determined whether or not to perform the hold change presentation (step A133).

  FIG. 173 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a distribution rate of the hold change presentation determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 173 (A), in this example, it is determined that the holding change presentation is performed at a ratio of 70% of the distribution ratio. The remaining distribution ratio of 30% is to be separately performed (effect that is not on hold change effect).

  If it is determined in step A133 that the peripheral control unit 1511 does not perform the suspension change effect, that is, if it is determined NO in step A133, the process proceeds to step A140 to clear the execution flag of the suspension change effect determination process ( Step A140) The process returns from the subroutine of the hold change presentation determination process to the presentation control process routine. In this case, the substantial suspension change presentation process described later is not executed.

  If it is determined in step A133 that the periphery control unit 1511 determines that the on-hold change effect is to be performed, that is, if it is determined that step A133 is YES, the process proceeds to step A134 to set an execution flag for on-hold change effect processing (step A134). ). Thereby, the execution of the pending change presentation process is determined.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires a final display color random number (for example, 0 to 6) (step A135), refers to the value of the final display color determination random number and the final display color determination table, and performs final display The color is determined (step A136), and the reserved image of the determined final display color is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step A137).

  FIG. 173B shows an example of a final display color determination table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 173 (B), if the value of the acquired final display color determining random number is “0”, the final display color of the reserve image is determined to be “blue”, and if “1”, the reserve image is If the final display color of is determined to be "yellow" and "2" the final display color of the reserve image is determined to be "green", and if "3" the final display color of the reserve image is determined to be "orange" The final display color of the reserve image is determined to be "purple" if it is "4", the final display color of the reserve image is determined to be "red" if it is "5", and the reserve image is if it is "6" The final display color of is determined to be "rainbow".

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 sets “1 (stored)” in the storage flag indicating that the final display color has been stored (step A138), and it is determined what number of the pending image is the target of the pending change effect Set the value of the display location counter to the number representing the display location, "4" in this example (step A139), proceed to step A140, clear the execution flag of the pending change effect determination process (step A140), and change pending The process exits the subroutine of the effect determination process and returns to the routine of the effect control process. In this case, the pending change presentation process is executed.

[Hold change effect processing]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the pending change presentation process executed by the periphery control unit 1511. When the suspension control effect processing starts, the peripheral control unit 1511 first determines whether the execution flag is set (step A150). The execution flag is set in step A134 of the hold change presentation determination process described above.

  If it is determined in step A150 that the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the execution flag is not set, that is, if it is determined NO in step A150, the subroutine of the pending change presentation process is performed without performing the substantial process. Then, the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, the on-hold change effect is not substantially performed.

  If it is determined in step A150 that the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the execution flag is set, that is, if it is determined YES in step A150, whether or not there is a button operation (whether the operation button 410 has been pressed). Is determined (step A151). That is, the state in which the execution flag is set is the state in which the operation on the operation button 410 by the player is validated.

  If it is determined in step A151 that the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that there is a button operation, that is, if it is determined that step A151 is YES, the operation random number (for example, 0 to 6) is acquired (step A152). The value of the operation random number and the operation display color selection table are referenced (step A153), the display color is determined (step A154), and the hold image of the determined display color is shown in FIG. The image is stored in the reserve image storage area (step A155), and the process proceeds to step A156.

  FIG. 173C is a diagram showing an example of the operation display color selection table stored in the ROM (not shown). As shown in FIG. 173 (C), if the value of the acquired operation random number is “0”, the display color of the hold image is determined to be “rainbow”, and if “1”, the display color of the hold image is "Yellow" is determined, if "2" the display color of the reserve image is determined to "green", if "3" the final display color of the reserve image is determined to "orange", "4" If the final display color of the reserve image is determined to be "purple", if "5", the final display color of the reserve image is determined to be "green"; if "6", the final display color of the reserve image is " "Rainbow" is determined.

  On the other hand, if the periphery control unit 1511 determines that the button operation is not performed at step A151, that is, if it is determined that step A151 is NO, the process of step A152 to step A155 is not directly performed, and step A156 is directly performed. Go to

  In step A156, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether a stop display command has been received (step A156). That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that there is reception of the stop display command when it is specified that the command analyzed in the command analysis in step S601 is the stop display command.

  If it is determined in step A156 that the peripheral control unit 1511 has received the stop display command, that is, if it is determined YES in step A156, the execution flag of the pending change presentation process is cleared (step A157). The process returns from the subroutine of the pending change presentation process to the presentation control process routine. In this case, no subsequent hold change presentation is performed. Further, in this example, the state in which the player operates the operation button 410 is ended.

  If it is determined in step A156 that the peripheral control unit 1511 has not received the stop display command, that is, if it is determined that step A156 is NO, the process of step A157 is not performed, and the process of holding change effect processing is performed. The process exits the subroutine and returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, since the execution flag is set, the subroutine of the pending change presentation process is subsequently executed. Therefore, every time there is a button operation, step A152 to step A155 are executed. Therefore, the display color of the hold image changes.

  As described above, the pending change presentation is performed on condition that the pending number instructed by the control command (first pending number designation command “4”) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4) set in advance. It has become. Therefore, the player is widely given the opportunity to perform the hold change presentation. After that, during execution of the pending change effect, the display color of the pending image 1524 displayed in the pending number display area 1510 changes each time the operation on the operation input device (the operation button 410) is performed. . Therefore, during the on-hold change effect, an opportunity for the player to operate the operation input device is given not only once but a plurality of times. Moreover, each time the operation button 410 is operated, the display color of the holding image as the effect target changes each time. Thus, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect by the on-hold change effect is expanded, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

[Hold image shift process]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of pending image shift processing executed by the periphery control unit 1511. When the reserve image shift process is started, the peripheral control unit 1511 first determines whether the shift flag is set (step A160). The shift flag is to be set in step A127 of the number-of-holds specification command processing described above.

  If it is determined in step A160 that the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the shift flag is not set, that is, if it is determined NO in step A160, the subroutine of the pending image shift processing is performed without performing the substantial processing. Then, the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, substantially no shift of the display position of the reserved image (moving to the left) is performed.

  If it is determined in step A160 that the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the shift flag is set, that is, if step A160 is determined as YES, the second to fourth reserved image storage areas in FIG. Copy the reserved images of each to copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown) (step A161), clear the first to fourth reserved image storage areas (step A162), and copy areas 1 to 3 (not shown) Are stored in the first to third reserved image storage areas (step A163). See FIG. 173 (E).

  Next, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the storage flag is set (step A164). The storage flag is set in step A138 of the hold change presentation determination process described above.

  If it is determined in step A164 that the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the storage flag is not set, that is, if it is determined NO in step A164, the pending image shift is performed without performing each process of step A165 to step A169. After the process subroutine, the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, substantially only the shift of the display position of the hold image (moving to the left) is performed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A164 that the peripheral control unit 1511 determines that the storage flag is set, that is, if it is determined YES in step A164, this indicates that the on-hold change effect has been performed. The peripheral control unit 1511 decrements the value of the display location counter by 1 (step A165), proceeds to step A166, and determines whether the value of the display location counter is “1 (position for displaying the hold image in the final display color)”. Is determined (step A166). By the process of step A165, the display position of the hold image set as the effect target is updated.

  When the peripheral control unit 1511 determines in step A166 that the value of the display location counter is not "1", that is, when it is determined NO in step A166, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs each process of step A167 to step A169. Without, the subroutine of the hold image shift process is exited and the process returns to the effect control process routine. In this case, again, substantially only the shift of the display position of the reserved image (moving to the left) is performed.

  On the other hand, if the peripheral control unit 1511 determines in step A166 that the value of the display location counter is “1”, that is, if it determines that step A166 is YES, each process of step A167 to step A169 is performed. I do. That is, the reserved image of the final display color determined and stored first is stored in the first reserved image storage area (step A167), the storage flag is cleared (step A168), and "0" is displayed in the display location counter. It sets (step A169), it exits the subroutine of reservation image shift processing and returns to the routine of production control processing.

  The display of the reserve image on the display panel of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed by outputting the image data in the information output process of step S605 in FIG.

  As is apparent from the above description, even if the player has not operated the button even once, the reserved image [normal display color "blue"] targeted for the effect is the first. When the display position is reached, the hold image is displayed in the final display color determined and stored previously, and the display color changes.

  Therefore, even after the hold change effect is finished, in other words, even after the validity period of the game board side effect display device 1600 has ended, along with the digestion of the hold memory in the first hold number display area 1510 The display color of the holding image (the holding image in which the display color is changed) as the target of the effect of sequentially moving the display position toward the first holding storage is maintained without being changed. Therefore, it is considered that the interest of the game is not reduced without any adverse effect being felt by the effect information provided from the game board side effect display device 1600 when the player advances the game. There is.

  In the specific example shown in the figure, when the holding image of the object of presentation is displayed as the first holding storage in the holding number display area 1510, it is changed to the final display color determined in advance, for example, “red” The hold image set as the target of presentation is displayed. For this reason, surprises and surprises are given to the player who intends to change the color of the reserved image by operating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player's game.

  As mentioned above, although an embodiment about pending change presentation was explained, a pending image may change to a display color different from a usual display color, for example, "blue", and a pending image may be displayed by a final display color in the last display position. The manner in which the player receives it is entirely left to the player's imagination.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for changing the display color of the holding image is a condition that the number of holdings has reached a predetermined number. Therefore, it is not restricted by whether the holding memory which has won to the starting opening is a big hit, whether the reach occurs, etc.

  In the above embodiment, when the stop display command is received as the end of the valid period of the button operation, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the big hit start command, the determination result notification command, the first hold number specification command , Or may be used. For example, when the big hit start command is received as the end of the valid period of the button operation, assuming that the button operation becomes effective over the plural times of the variation display of the decorative symbol until the big hit game is started, The display color will change.

  Therefore, during the hold change effect, an opportunity for the player to operate the operation button 410 is given over not only variable display by one decorative symbol but also variable display by a plurality of decorative symbols. . Moreover, each time the operation button 410 is operated, the display color of the holding image as the effect target changes each time. Thus, since the opportunity to participate in the participatory effect by the on-hold change effect is expanded, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game entertainment.

[Example of effect of door frame side effect display device]
Moreover, although the example which uses the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 as a simple push button similarly to the general production button was shown in various embodiment mentioned above, the production operation in this specification to various production is shown. A special effect (button display effect) using the door frame side effect display device 460 of the unit 400 may be performed.

  In the modifications described below, a first modification in which a button display effect is added to the above-described hold notification effect and a second modification showing a button display effect performed in another form will be described.

[A first modified example in which a button display effect is added to the on-hold notice effect]
The button display effect of the first modification will be described below.
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is not being played by the player, or when the player is playing a game and the button display effect is not being performed, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame The side second effect display device 460A is not displayed for energy saving, or a logo corresponding to the model of the game board 5, a logo unique to a maker, and the like are displayed (default display). Since the door frame side effect display device 460 has a narrow image displayable range compared to the game board side effect display device 1600 and is vertically long, a predetermined number of characters are displayed in the vertical direction of the vertically long screen, The message scrolls from bottom to top. In this modification, a message image of a logo corresponding to the model of the game board 5 or a logo unique to a maker is scrolled from bottom to top at a predetermined scroll speed with three characters in the vertical direction as the maximum number of characters Display control is performed so that the scroll display is repeated again after all the message images are displayed.

  Then, as in the case of the hold notification effect of the embodiment described above, in the hold notification effect in which the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is held, the color of the hold changes when the button is pressed on the game board side effect display device 1600! Etc., all of the message images leading to the operation promotion such as “” are displayed at one time, suggesting that the operation to the operation button 410 is effective, and an operation promotion effect to urge the player to operate the button is executed. ing. Here, in the first modified example, at the time of the hold notification effect, the door frame side effect display device 460 also displays a message image that leads to the operation promotion such as “The hold color changes when the button is pressed!” It has become. Further, the present invention is not limited to the above messages, and any message that displays the same message as the game board side effect display device 1600 or a message having the same meaning can be appropriately selected according to the game state.

  In addition, since the door frame side effect display device 460 has a narrower image displayable range than the game board side effect display device 1600 and is vertically long, when the button is pressed like the game board side effect display device 1600 The message will be scrolled from the bottom to the top so that some characters will be displayed sequentially in the vertical direction of the vertical screen without displaying all of the message images that the color of the hold changes! Ru. In this modification, the maximum number of characters is three characters in the vertical direction, and all messages indicating, for example, “The hold color changes when the button is pressed!” Are displayed at least once within a valid period for the operation on the operation button 410. The display is controlled so that the scroll display is performed from the bottom to the top at the scroll speed. In addition, the size of the character sequentially displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is the same size as the size of one character of the message image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or the game board side effect display It is assumed that characters of a size larger than the size of one character of the message image displayed on the device 1600 are displayed. This makes it easy for the player to identify the message image even though the display device has a relatively small size.

  The scroll speed is different depending on the type of the operation promotion effect, because the length of the period during which the operation on the operation button 410 is valid, and the number of characters and types of messages, a plurality of scroll speeds are stored depending on the case. The scroll speed is selected and set based on the type of the operation promotion effect to be executed ("the length of the valid period" and the "number of characters and type of message" are different) (scroll speed setting means).

  For example, when different messages are scrolled and displayed for the same effective period, the scroll speed is set as follows. Specifically, when displaying a message image (17 characters) of "Press the button to change the color of the hold!" For the effective period of "5 seconds", scroll all characters in 5 seconds And, even if the player has finished viewing all of the message images, the scroll speed A (for example, 17 characters of scroll display in 4 seconds are completed) may occur a margin period in which the operation to the operation button 410 is possible. Then, the scroll display is performed by setting the remaining speed of 1 second). In addition, when displaying a message image (8 characters) "Press the button!" As another message image, while scrolling all characters twice in 5 seconds, the message image is displayed twice. Even if the player has completely watched the scroll speed B at which a margin period for enabling operation to the operation button 410 can occur (for example, the scroll display of eight characters in four seconds is completed twice and a margin period of one second Set the remaining speed of) to scroll display. As described above, the player is watching the message image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 by setting the scroll speed such that a margin period is generated when displaying various message images. Also, the operation on the operation button 410 can be enabled.

Moreover, although 1st LED422a, 423a and 2nd LED422b, 423b are arrange | positioned at the rendering operation unit 400 mentioned above and it demonstrated that light emission decoration was carried out around the operation button 410, in this example, it does not stay in decoration, The button display effect has a function of suggesting a game state or the like to the player by light emission.
This will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 161 is a front view of the effect operation unit 400.
Note that, in FIG. 161, in order to facilitate understanding of the suggestion of the game situation to the player using the LED, the light emitting decoration is referred to as a light emitting unit.
In this example, a plurality of light emitting units are provided on the outside and the inside of the periphery of the operation button 410, respectively. The inner light emitting portions 401a to 401c are on the left side of the operation button 410, the inner right light emitting portions 402a to 402c are on the right side, and a total of six light emitting portions (inner light emitting portions) exist. In the outer light emitting unit, there are a total of eight light emitting units (outside light emitting units), which are outer light emitting units 403 a to 403 h so as to surround the operation button 410.

When the button display effect is not performed, all of the light emitting units inside and outside of the effect operation unit 400 and the first button decoration unit 411 a are turned off in order to reduce the consumed power as much as possible.
In addition, when the button display effect is performed, all the light emitting units on the inside and the outside of the effect operation unit 400 and the first button decoration unit 411a are lit simultaneously. As described above, by switching from the state in which all the light emitting parts are turned off to the state in which all the light emitting parts are turned on, the player's attention can be focused on the rendering operation unit 400 to strongly impress the start of the rendering requiring the manipulation button In addition, since it is possible to give a surprise to the player by lighting up a place which has not been lit up until then, it is possible to raise expectations for the button display effect and to improve the interest for the game.

  Then, after lighting all the light emitting parts inside and outside of the rendering operation unit 400 and the first button decoration part 411 a all at once, the light emitting parts inside and outside are gradually extinguished with the lapse of the effective period, and finally Indicated emission control is performed during the effective period for turning off the first button decoration part 411a. In the effective period suggestion light emission control, during the button display effect, it is a period in which the operation on the operation button 410 is effective, and the remaining period of the effective period corresponds to the inner and outer light emitting portions and the first button decoration portion 411a. It can be clearly shown to the player who focuses on the rendering operation unit 400 by the light emission decoration.

  As a pattern of effective period suggestive light emission control, the predetermined number of outer light emitting parts 403a to 403 are turned clockwise (for example, extinguished from the outer light emitting parts 403a and 403b, and then 403c and 403d) every predetermined time (for example, one second). 2) turn off the light, turn off all the outer and inner light-emitting parts and turn off the inner left light-emitting parts 401a-c and the inner right light-emitting parts 402a-cLED on the right and left of the liquid crystal, and finally the first button decoration part A light emission pattern A for turning off the light 411a, and turning off the outer light emitting parts 403a to 403 h at the center after a predetermined time (for example, every 1 second), (turn off from the outer light emitting parts 403a and 403e, and then 403b, 403d and 403f , 403h, and left and right 403c, 403g are finally turned off), and all the outer light emitting parts 403a to 403h are turned off. Left and right inner left light unit 401A～c, turns off the inner right light unit 402A～cLED, finally turns off the first button escutcheon 411a provided a light emitting pattern B.

  In addition, it is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, as a pattern of a message displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 at the time of operation promotion effect in button display effect A display pattern A in which the character color of the message is displayed in white and a display pattern B in which the character color of the message is displayed in red are provided. Similarly, in the message displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, a button display pattern A in which the character color is displayed in white and a button display pattern B in which the character color is displayed in red are provided.

Further, in the operation promotion effect in this example, the combination of the display patterns A and B, the button display patterns A and B, and the light emission patterns A and B indicates the player's expectation for the jackpot through the suspension notice effect. It is supposed to be.
In this example, the peripheral control unit determines each of the patterns A and B, and the determination mode of each of the patterns A and B depends on whether or not there is a hold leading to a big hit in the hold targeted for the hold notification effect. It is different. That is, the display pattern A, the button display pattern A, and the light emission pattern A have low expectations for the big hit, and the display pattern B, the button display pattern B, and the light emission pattern B have high expectations for the big hit.

For example, in the case where the display pattern is A, the button display pattern is B, the light emission pattern is A, the display pattern is B, the button display pattern is A, and the light emission pattern is B, the latter is more likely to expect a big hit high. That is, of the combinations of display patterns A and B, button display patterns A and B, and light emission patterns A and B, the larger the number of patterns A, the lower the expectation for jackpot, and the larger the number of various patterns B, the larger jacks It means that the degree of expectation for is high.
As a result, the player is not limited to suggesting means for merely urging the operation on the operation button 410, and the player has a high effect of making the player feel happy by the aspect of the operation promotion effect. It can be kept high.

  In addition, when the operation to the operation button 410 is detected, and when the effective period expires without detecting the operation, all the light emitting units inside and outside of the rendering operation unit 400 are turned off, and Disappears the message image, and ends the promotion effect.

  In addition, when the operation to the operation button 410 is detected, the door frame side effect display device of the effect effect of the effect that will be expanded on the game board side effect display device 1600 based on detecting the release of the operation Display at 460 (means for displaying a message different from that of the central liquid crystal display 1500). Since the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 may be covered by hand while the operation on the operation button 410 is being performed, the player can display the door frame side effect display device 460 By starting the explanatory effect when the screen becomes visible (when the release of the operation is detected), it is possible to reliably transmit the explanatory effect to the player from the first state. As the explanatory effect, for example, a message image of “chance if the color of the hold changes!” Is scroll-displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 for a predetermined time. As the predetermined time of the explanatory effect, a time (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which the message image of "the chance is required if the color of the hold changes!" Can be scrolled is set at a predetermined scroll speed.

  In addition, when the effective period of the operation on the operation button 410 has expired without detecting the pressing operation, an assistance effect such as promoting the next operation is performed. As an auxiliary effect, for example, a message image of "I pressed something to happen ..." is scroll-displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. As the predetermined time of the assistance effect, a time (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which the message image of "The message has happened if something happens by pressing ..." can be scrolled is set. In addition, the assistance effect continues to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 across the variation of the special symbol until the operation button 410 is operated, and the player operates the operation button 410 in the next button display effect Encourage them to be

  In this way, by continuing to display the message image of "If something happens if you press ...", it will temporarily give the player a degree of sparseness, but by that the button display effect of the next time As a result, the player's operation on the operation button 410 can be made active, and as a result, the player's participation in the button display effect can be promoted. Note that, when the hold notification effect is performed next, the auxiliary effect is ended at the start of the hold notification effect even if the operation button 410 is not operated.

  At the time of operating the operation button 410, by making the player visually recognize the operation button 410, by performing the promotion effect, the description effect and the auxiliary effect in the door frame side effect display device 460, The flow and the meaning can be reliably transmitted and explained, and the enjoyment of the effects that the player participates can be deepened, and the interest for the game can be improved.

[Second Modified Example Showing Button Display Effect Performed in Other Forms]
Moreover, as a button display effect, it can be used not only for the operation promotion effect but also for various other effects. For example, the door frame side effect display device 460, the outer light emitting unit, and the inner light emitting unit may display the game balls separately according to the game state. In the game state (the state with no time saving) in which the separation display recommends the left hitting, the “left arrow image” is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, and the game state recommending the right hitting In the big hit state, the “right arrow image” is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460.

Furthermore, control is performed to sequentially turn on / off the outer light emitting unit from "right to left" or "left to right" together with the above-described separate display. Specifically, in the case of a gaming state where "right to left" is recommended, that is, to hit the left, the outer light emitting section 403c is first blinked once. Next, the outer light emitting unit 403 b and the outer light emitting unit 403 d are blinked once. Next, the outer light emitting part 403a and the outer light emitting part 403e are blinked once. Next, the outer light emitting unit 403 f and the outer light emitting unit 403 h are blinked once. Finally, the outer light emitting unit 403g is blinked once. Thereby, since the outer side light emission part 403 is lighted so as to flow from the right to the left, it can be recalled that the user strikes the left intuitively. Incidentally, in the case of a gaming state where "right to left" is recommended, that is, right hitting, the outer light emitting parts are sequentially turned on / off in the reverse order to the case of "right to left".
In the inner light emitting portion, the left inner light emitting portions 401a to 401c are turned on in the gaming state where it is recommended to hit the left, and in the opposite case, the inner right light emitting portions 402a to 402c in the gaming state where the inside of the right is recommended. Lights up.

  According to the above configuration, by performing the split display on the part that the player easily sees, it is possible to actively communicate the left and right separation to the player, and further, the split display is performed on the door frame side. It is also possible to facilitate the board design of the game board 5.

  Also, the start / end control of such separate display may be controlled as follows. For example, when a game state (such as a short time state) recommending a right hit occurs, the display of the “right arrow image” is started on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This makes it possible to make a striking impression of the striking direction and to prevent the mistake of striking. In addition, when the operation on the operation button 410 is detected by the player in a state in which the “right arrow image” is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the “right The “image of arrow” may be hidden (erased).

  Depending on the player, there is a possibility that the display on the door frame side effect display device 460 may be bothersome, so that it is possible to prevent such a player from being bothersome. Furthermore, when the “right arrow image” displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is not displayed (erased) by detecting the operation on the operation button 410, “on the door frame side effect display device 460” Instead of the arrow image on the right, the current gaming state may be displayed. For example, when the time is short, "time in the middle!" When the probability change is "something in the middle!" When the jackpot game is "big hit remaining ○ (eg 16) R", etc. It can be exemplified that the display can be used to determine whether it is in the game state. As a result, it is possible to make the player grasp not only the recommendation of the separation in the current gaming state but also why it is recommended to hit the right.

In addition, as a button display effect, a standby button display effect dedicated to a so-called wait-for-customer state may be performed as a player does not play a game.
The standby state is generated when a predetermined standby state generation condition (a predetermined time elapses without symbol fluctuation in the normal state) is established, and the standby button display effect is started along with the generation of the standby state. In the standby button display effect, a demonstration message is displayed on the door frame side effect display device. As an example of the demonstration message display, for example, scrolling the model name of the game board 5 or the name of the maker may be mentioned. It is possible to enhance the decorativeness and the effect of attracting customers by displaying a message on a site easily visible to hall customers.

  In addition, when the player temporarily leaves the seat in the standby state, a message image of "during break" may be displayed. In this case, a message image of "during break" is displayed on both of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by button operation detection, and a message image of "during break" is displayed. In the button operation detection of, it may be controlled to erase the message image of "during break". By displaying such a message image at a location easily visible to the player, it is possible to prevent other hole customers from accidentally starting a game and causing trouble.

[About error display]
If the pachinko machine 1 enters an error state due to some cause (for example, a ball jam), an image (for example, a message "Please remove the ball") is displayed on the game board liquid crystal display device 1600. At that time, by operating the operation button 410, the error image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is not displayed, and the error image is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. It has become. Thereby, it is possible to prevent giving of sedibility or annoyance due to being displayed until an attendant of the game hall rushes in.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 is not limited to liquid crystal, and may be dot matrix display.

  Moreover, although the example which arrange | positions the door frame side effect display apparatus 460 separately from the button lens 411 (operation receiving part) was shown in the Example mentioned above, it is not limited to this, The door frame side effect display apparatus 460 May be configured to be pressed integrally with the button lens 411 (operation receiving unit).

  Moreover, although the example which scroll-displays a message image on the door-frame side effect display apparatus 460 was demonstrated in the Example mentioned above, you may make it sequentially switch and display not only a scroll display but one character at a time. In this case, by setting the size of the character display so that one character is displayed using the entire screen of the door frame side effect display device 460, a message is sent to the player even though the display device has a relatively small size. Images can be more easily identified.

  In addition, the message scroll-displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is not limited to the one that scrolls upward from the bottom, but also scrolls downward from the top, scrolls from left to right, and scrolls from right to left It may be In addition, as long as the entire content of the message can be grasped by the number of characters (for example, “push”, “PUSH”, and the like) falling within the range of the door frame side effect display device 460, the scroll display may not be performed.

  Furthermore, as a method of representing the player's expectation for the jackpot in the operation promotion effect, the combination of the display patterns A and B, the button display patterns A and B, and the light emission patterns A and B is not limited to the above. In addition to that, for example, the direction of scrolling, the speed of scrolling, etc. may indicate a high expectation for jackpot.

  For example, a scroll pattern A in which the message scrolls upward from the bottom and a scroll pattern B in which the message scrolls downward from the top are provided, and all the messages are at least once at the message scrolling speed. A scroll speed A to be displayed and a scroll speed B at which all the messages are displayed at least twice are provided. The combination of the scroll patterns A and B and the scroll speeds A and B is such that the expectation for the jackpot represents the height to the player. For example, the larger the number of patterns B among various patterns, the higher the expectation for the jackpot is.

  Further, in the button display effect, although it has been described that the same message as the game board side effect display device 1600 or a message having the same meaning is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the door frame side effect display device 460 The display / non-display of may be switchable. In this case, switching may be appropriately made possible by an operation on a predetermined operation unit by a player or a person in the hall. In addition, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the message image such as “press a button !!” displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the battle effect of the above-described embodiment is also used. Scroll display may be performed.

  Further, in the “effective period suggestive light emission control” described above, during the button display effect, it is a period during which the operation on the operation button 410 is effective using the light emitting portions outside and inside, and suggests the remaining period of the effective period. Although it is a thing, the structure which is suggested not only by the light emission part of an outer side and an inner side but the door frame side effect display apparatus 460 may be sufficient. In this example, while the operation on the operation button 410 is effective, the door frame side effect display device 460 displays the number of seconds corresponding to the effective period simultaneously with the “effective period suggestive light emission control”, and the player is counted down. The effective period is notified to the user, and the player can intuitively grasp the effective period as compared with the case where only the “effective period suggestive light emission control” is executed.

  In the embodiment described above, the explanation effect is provided by detecting the release of the pressing operation, but the explanation effect is immediately given by detecting the pressing operation without detecting the release of the pressing operation. You may do so. Further, as the effect performed by detecting the pressing operation, the following effects may be performed instead of the explanatory effects. For example, after deleting the message image “The color of the hold changes when the button is pressed?”, While the pressing operation is being detected (while the pressing operation is being performed), the entire door frame side effect display device 460 is displayed. An image of a predetermined color may be displayed, and the brightness of the image display may be increased more than when displaying a message image. Then, depending on the type of the predetermined color image (white image, red image, etc.) displayed on the entire surface of the door frame side effect display device 460, the degree of expectation of the big hit may be changed (for example, red image) Is more likely to win a big hit than a white image). By doing this, while operating the operation button 410, a decorative effect is created such that light leaks from the gap of the player's hand blocking the door frame side effect display device 460, and by the light emission color thereof Since the degree of expectation for the big hit can be changed, it is possible to improve the game interest with a new effect of focusing attention on the display image of the door frame side effect display device 460 while operating the operation button 410.

  Although the present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, and a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a is formed at a portion on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The button lens 411 may not have the first button decoration portion 411a.

  In the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the button frame 412 is not attached. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed over the entire circumference of a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (ie, the entire periphery of the outer periphery of the in-operation button decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A is surrounded from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411) Although the thing provided with the button base 413 (main-body part 413a) which protruded cylindrically to the 2 base unit 450 side was shown, it is not limited to this, but the decoration member 432 in the operation button and the door frame side second production It may be protruded toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire circumference of the outer circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer periphery of the button lens 411 or may be a shape not along the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (a flat decoration by sticking or printing a seal, a three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief, etc.) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. The button base 413 may be colored or colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable to perform light diffusion processing such as embossing, slit, or prism on at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side.

  In the embodiment described above, the lower tray 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outside portion of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the tray unit cover 326. The lower plate is such that it is recessed rearward from the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A) and is mutually connected behind the rendering operation unit 400 (the second rendering operation unit 400A). It is good also as 322, dents back only from the part of the right outside of production operation unit 400 (the 2nd production operation unit 400A), and one part turns to the back of production operation unit 400 (the 2nd production operation unit 400A) It may be

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the shape (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed backward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. Although the example in which it dented in the shape was shown, it does not limit to this, It is good also as a polygon cylinder surface shape or the front surface dented in polyhedron shape.

  Moreover, although said example showed the example which attached the presentation operation unit 400 (2nd presentation operation unit 400A) in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, it does not limit to this, "an operation dial, a touch panel etc. "Having the operation device of", "having the rotating body having the decoration on the surface", "having the decoration having the decoration and the movable device for moving the decoration", "the game A unit provided with a character, an item, a logo, a decorative body imitating a scene (diorama) and the like in a three-dimensional manner according to the concept of the machine, and the like may be attached.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an area slightly larger than a half of the storage area (storage area) of the gaming ball in plan view of the lower plate 322 is set by the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) as a covering portion. Although the example which covers visually hard from the front was shown, it is not limited to this, and it may be made to make visual hard to see from the front an area of half or less of the storage area of gaming balls in the lower plate 322 The whole of the plate 322 may be difficult to view from the front.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 100 Door frame base unit 320 Plate unit 321 Upper plate 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate ball outlet hole (lower plate outlet)
322b Relief part 322c Ball guiding part (inducing means)
322d Buffer (inducing means)
322e return part (guide means)
323 Dish unit base 323 c Lower disc ball supply port 324 Upper disc main body 325 Lower disc main body 326 Dish unit cover (covering part)
326a Effect Operation Unit Mounting Part (Covered Part)
326b dish front upper decoration part 326c dish front lower decoration part 326d lower dish opening 327 upper dish ball release button (discharge operation part)
328 Ball lending button 328a Identification unit 329 Return button 329a Identification unit 330 Sphere loan return display unit 330a Sphere display unit 330b Return display unit 330c Error display unit 336 Volume control button 336a Upper button 336b Lower button 336c Identification unit 336d Identification unit 337 Brightness Adjustment button 337a Upper button 337b Lower button 337c Identification part 337d Identification part 340 Lower tray cover 400 Effect operation unit (covering part)
400A second rendering operation unit (cover)
401a inner left light emitter 401b inner left light emitter 401c inner left light emitter 402a inner right light emitter 402b inner right light emitter 402c inner right light emitter 403a outer light emitter 403b outer light emitter 403c outer light emitter 403d outer light emitter 403e outer light emitter 403f outer side light emitting portion 403g outer side light emitting portion 403h outer side light emitting portion 410 operation button (operation receiving portion)
411 button lens 460 door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
550 door frame right side unit 551 right unit base 552 door frame right side decorative substrate 552A door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552B door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552a left LED
552b Right LED
552c middle LED
5520a LED substrate 5520b LED substrate 5520c LED substrate 5520d LED unit 553 Right unit left diffusion lens member 553a Body portion 553b Rear wall portion 553c Notched portion 553d Housing recess 553e Input lens portion 553f Side reflection portion 554 Right unit left decoration member 554a Side portion 554b Outer surface 554c Inner surface 555 Right unit left cover 556 Right unit right diffusion lens member 556a Back wall 556c Notch 556d Housing recess 556e Input lens 556f Side reflector 557 Right unit right decorative member 557a Side 557b Outer surface 557c inner surface 557d uneven portion 5570 lower end 5571 lower end 5572 lower end 5573 lower end 5574 first light guide sheet 5575 second light guide sheet 5576 third light guide sheet 558 right unit right cover 559 right unit left light shielding member 559a main body 559b rear wall 559c cutout 559d reinforcement portion 560 right unit right light shielding member 561 right unit decorative lens member 561a circular decorative portion 561b multi-faced decorative portion 562 right unit decorative base 563 right unit cover 564 Member 565 Decorative sheet discrimination member 565a Discrimination sensor 565b Discrimination sensor 565c Discrimination sensor 565d Discrimination sensor 565e Decorative sheet detection sensor 565f Sheet type discrimination sensor 566 Partition plate 566a Side part 5660 Rough surface part 5661 Reflector plate 5662 Light guiding path 5663 Light exit part 5664 Part 567 Light shielding plate 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guiding part 1004 Right lower rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stop part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Security recess 1009 Positioning projection 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notched part 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out recessed part 1112 Opening 1113 Fitted hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engaging step 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step 1122 Through hole 1123 Protruding pin 1124 Engaging claw 1125 Engaging piece 1126 Out port 1127 Notch 1128 Mounting hole 1129 Insertion hole 1150 Game panel (second embodiment)
1151 Out port 1152 Notched portion 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Substrate holder 1201 Ejection part 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control substrate 1320 Main control substrate box 1400 Function display unit 1400a Function display area 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control unit 1510 Control board 1511 peripheral control unit 1512 liquid crystal display control unit 1520 peripheral control board box 1600 game board side effect display device (first effect display means)
1601 left fixed piece 1602 right fixed piece 2000 table unit 2001 general winning opening 2002 first starting opening 2003 gate section 2004 second starting opening 2005 lower large winning opening 2006 upper large winning opening 2100 starting opening unit 2101 unit opening 2101 ball base 2102 ball receiving member 2103 Front decoration base 2104 Front center decoration substrate 2105 Front decoration member 2106 Guide passage member 2107 First starting port sensor 2200 Side unit 2201 Unit base 2201a First shelf 2201b Projection 2202 First ball support 2203 Second ball support 2203a Two shelf portion 2203b Ball receiving portion 2204 Side decoration substrate 2205 Substrate cover 2205a Leading portion 2300 Attacker unit 2305 Gate sensor 2560 Front side movable effect unit 2570 Front side movable effect unit 3100 Back up possible Production unit 3200 back under before moving production unit 3300 back right movable production unit 3400 Urahidari mobile production unit 3500 back under after moving production unit 3600 back four corners mobile production unit

Claims (2)

A game area in which a predetermined game is performed,
A bulging portion having a predetermined internal space formed by bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in front view;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
An operating device accommodated in the internal space and operable by a player;
A lower plate body provided with a standing wall having a predetermined height, and a lower plate capable of receiving game media from the upper plate;
The lower plate main body is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower dish body has a first lower tray unit area facing the front of the game machine is formed, provided the said integrally with the first lower tray section to the inner space inward side with respect to the first lower tray portion And a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed ,
Further, the bulging portion has an upper plate front cover portion positioned on the front side of the upper plate,
The lower pan front cover portion provided on the front side of the first lower pan portion has a retracting portion positioned on the rear side in plan view with respect to the upper portion of the first pan lower portion of the upper pan front cover portion. A game machine characterized by having . A game area in which a predetermined game is performed,
A bulging portion having a predetermined internal space formed by bulging forward in the lower part of the game area in front view;
An upper plate provided on the upper surface side of the bulging portion, and storing a game medium for playing a game in the game area;
A rendering device accommodated in the internal space and exhibiting a predetermined rendering effect;
A lower plate body provided with a standing wall having a predetermined height, and a lower plate capable of receiving game media from the upper plate;
The lower plate main body is provided in a space provided in parallel with the internal space in the bulging portion in the left-right direction,
The lower dish body has a first lower tray unit area facing the front of the game machine is formed, provided the said integrally with the first lower tray section to the inner space inward side with respect to the first lower tray portion And a second lower plate portion where an area not facing the front of the gaming machine is formed ,
Further, the bulging portion has an upper plate front cover portion positioned on the front side of the upper plate,
The lower pan front cover portion provided on the front side of the first lower pan portion has a retracting portion positioned on the rear side in plan view with respect to the upper portion of the first pan lower portion of the upper pan front cover portion. A game machine characterized by having .